PR ld/12851
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
729c05fc 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
8a308ae8 5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
ac145307 25@set C6X
49fa1e15 26@set H8300
0285c67d 27@set HPPA
0285c67d 28@set I960
0285c67d 29@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 30@set M68K
3c3bdf30 31@set MMIX
2469cfa2 32@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
33@set POWERPC
34@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
35@set Renesas
36@set SPU
37@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 38@set WIN32
e0001a05 39@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
40@end ifset
41@c man end
42
9160ea82
AM
43@ifnottex
44@dircategory Software development
45@direntry
252b5132 46* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
47@end direntry
48@end ifnottex
252b5132 49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
9fbcbd81 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
961999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
97Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
138@end ifset
139@ifset I960
140* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
142@ifset ARM
143* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144@end ifset
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
148@ifset M68HC11
149* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
151@ifset M68K
152* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
160@ifset SPU
161* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
163@ifset TICOFF
164* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
166@ifset WIN32
167* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
169@ifset XTENSA
170* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171@end ifset
252b5132
RH
172@end ifclear
173@ifclear SingleFormat
174* BFD:: BFD
175@end ifclear
176@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 180* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 181* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 182@end menu
84ec0e6d 183@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
184
185@node Overview
186@chapter Overview
187
188@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 190
0879a67a 191@ifset man
0285c67d 192@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 193ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
194@c man end
195
196@c man begin SEEALSO
197ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199@file{ld}.
200@c man end
201@end ifset
202
203@c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
ff5dcc92 205@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 206their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 207compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 208
ff5dcc92 209@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
210a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
0285c67d
NC
213@ifset man
214@c For the man only
ece2d90e 215This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
216@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
218@end ifset
219
252b5132 220@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
221This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
223write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226@end ifclear
227
228Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 231@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
232(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man end
235
252b5132
RH
236@node Invocation
237@chapter Invocation
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
ff5dcc92 241The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
242and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
0285c67d
NC
245@c man end
246
252b5132
RH
247@ifset UsesEnvVars
248@menu
249* Options:: Command Line Options
250* Environment:: Environment Variables
251@end menu
252
253@node Options
254@section Command Line Options
255@end ifset
256
257@cindex command line
258@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
259
260@c man begin OPTIONS
261
252b5132
RH
262The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 265For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
266object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269@smallexample
270ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271@end smallexample
272
ff5dcc92 273This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
274result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
ff5dcc92 278Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
279point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
284occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286noted in the descriptions below.
287
288@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
289Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
293
294Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298message @samp{No input files}.
299
36f63dca 300If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
301assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
306@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
311
312For options whose names are a single letter,
313option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315option that requires them.
316
317For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 318precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 319@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 320this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 321only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
322@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324output.
325
326Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331accepted.
252b5132 332
36f63dca
NC
333Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
335prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
337
338@smallexample
2509a395 339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
340@end smallexample
341
342This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
343silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350@smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
353
354Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355linker:
356
ff5dcc92 357@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 358@include at-file.texi
dff70155 359
2509a395
SL
360@kindex -a @var{keyword}
361@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
362This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
7ee314fa
AM
368@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377interface.
378
252b5132
RH
379@ifset I960
380@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
381@kindex -A @var{arch}
382@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
383@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
385In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
387@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 389archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
390family}, for details.
391
ff5dcc92 392Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
393other architecture families.
394@end ifset
395
396@ifclear SingleFormat
397@cindex binary input format
398@kindex -b @var{format}
399@kindex --format=@var{format}
400@cindex input format
401@cindex input format
402@item -b @var{input-format}
403@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
404@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 406@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 407that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 408configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 409to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
410default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414@xref{BFD}.
415
416You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418linking object files of different formats), by including
419@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 420particular format.
252b5132
RH
421
422The default format is taken from the environment variable
423@code{GNUTARGET}.
424@ifset UsesEnvVars
425@xref{Environment}.
426@end ifset
427You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
428@code{TARGET};
429@ifclear man
430see @ref{Format Commands}.
431@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
432@end ifclear
433
434@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@cindex compatibility, MRI
437@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 439For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 440files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
441@ifclear man
442@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443@end ifclear
444@ifset man
445the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446@end ifset
447Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 448the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
449scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
451specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453@cindex common allocation
454@kindex -d
455@kindex -dc
456@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 457@item -d
252b5132
RH
458@itemx -dc
459@itemx -dp
460These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
7ee314fa
AM
466@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
252b5132
RH
477@cindex entry point, from command line
478@kindex -e @var{entry}
479@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 480@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
481@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
b58f81ae
DJ
490@kindex --exclude-libs
491@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 493exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
494@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499be treated as hidden.
500
e1c37eb5
DK
501@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512regardless of this option.
513
252b5132
RH
514@cindex dynamic symbol table
515@kindex -E
516@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 517@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
518@item -E
519@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
520@itemx --no-export-dynamic
521When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
530
531If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534linking the program itself.
535
55255dae 536You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 537be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 538See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 539
8b747e1a
DK
540Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
36f63dca 544@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
545@cindex big-endian objects
546@cindex endianness
547@kindex -EB
548@item -EB
549Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551@cindex little-endian objects
552@kindex -EL
553@item -EL
554Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 555@end ifclear
252b5132 556
2509a395
SL
557@kindex -f @var{name}
558@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559@item -f @var{name}
560@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
561When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574machine specific performance.
575
576This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
2509a395
SL
579@kindex -F @var{name}
580@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 581@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 582@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
583When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594@var{name}.
595
ff5dcc92 596Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 597toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
598object files.
599@ifclear SingleFormat
600The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 601@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 602@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
603environment variable.
604@end ifclear
605The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 607
3dbf70a2 608@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
609@kindex -fini=@var{name}
610@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
611When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614the function to call.
615
252b5132
RH
616@kindex -g
617@item -g
618Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -G @var{value}
621@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 622@cindex object size
2509a395 623@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
624@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 631@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 632@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 633@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
634@itemx -soname=@var{name}
635When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641@kindex -i
642@cindex incremental link
643@item -i
644Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
3dbf70a2 646@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
647@kindex -init=@var{name}
648@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
649When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652function to call.
653
252b5132 654@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 655@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 656@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 657@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
658@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 662will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 663will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 664
ff5dcc92 665On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
666files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
673
674The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
ff5dcc92 681See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
682archives multiple times.
683
684You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686@ifset GENERIC
687This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 688if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
689behaviour of the AIX linker.
690@end ifset
691
692@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 693@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 694@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 695@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 696@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
697Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
699option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 702@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
703order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705option is specified.
252b5132 706
9c8ebd6a
DJ
707If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
252b5132
RH
710@ifset UsesEnvVars
711The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 712@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
713some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714@end ifset
715
716The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720@cindex emulation
721@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 722@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
723Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730configured.
731
732@cindex link map
733@kindex -M
734@kindex --print-map
735@item -M
736@itemx --print-map
737Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738information about the link, including the following:
739
740@itemize @bullet
741@item
3b83e13a 742Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
743@item
744How common symbols are allocated.
745@item
746All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
748@item
749The values assigned to symbols.
750
751Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757linker script containing:
758
759@smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763@end smallexample
764
765will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766option is used:
767
768@smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772@end smallexample
773
774See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775scripts.
252b5132
RH
776@end itemize
777
778@kindex -n
779@cindex read-only text
780@cindex NMAGIC
781@kindex --nmagic
782@item -n
783@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
784Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
787
788@kindex -N
789@kindex --omagic
790@cindex read/write from cmd line
791@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 792@item -N
252b5132
RH
793@itemx --omagic
794Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
795not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
797mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
800
801@kindex --no-omagic
802@cindex OMAGIC
803@item --no-omagic
804This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
808
809@kindex -o @var{output}
810@kindex --output=@var{output}
811@cindex naming the output file
812@item -o @var{output}
813@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 814Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
815option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818@kindex -O @var{level}
819@cindex generating optimized output
820@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 821If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 822the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
823should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 828
a712da20
NC
829@kindex -q
830@kindex --emit-relocs
831@cindex retain relocations in final executable
832@item -q
833@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 834Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
835Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837in larger executables.
838
dbab7a7b
NC
839This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
4f471f39
RS
841@kindex --force-dynamic
842@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843@item --force-dynamic
844Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845to VxWorks targets.
846
252b5132
RH
847@cindex partial link
848@cindex relocatable output
849@kindex -r
1049f94e 850@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 851@item -r
1049f94e 852@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 853Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 854turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
855linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 858@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
859If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
62bf86b4
HPN
863When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867with input files in other formats at all.
868
252b5132
RH
869This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871@kindex -R @var{file}
872@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873@cindex symbol-only input
874@item -R @var{filename}
875@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
ff5dcc92 881For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 882followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 883the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
884
885@kindex -s
886@kindex --strip-all
887@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 888@item -s
252b5132
RH
889@itemx --strip-all
890Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892@kindex -S
893@kindex --strip-debug
894@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 895@item -S
252b5132
RH
896@itemx --strip-debug
897Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899@kindex -t
900@kindex --trace
901@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 902@item -t
252b5132 903@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 904Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
905
906@kindex -T @var{script}
907@kindex --script=@var{script}
908@cindex script files
909@item -T @var{scriptfile}
910@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 912@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 913@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
914output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917options accumulate.
252b5132 918
14be8564
L
919@kindex -dT @var{script}
920@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921@cindex script files
922@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933@samp{gcc}).
934
252b5132
RH
935@kindex -u @var{symbol}
936@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937@cindex undefined symbol
938@item -u @var{symbol}
939@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946@kindex -Ur
947@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 948@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
949For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 951turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
952@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956@samp{-r} for the others.
957
577a0623
AM
958@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966in a linker script.
a854a4a7 967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -v
969@kindex -V
970@kindex --version
971@cindex version
972@item -v
973@itemx --version
974@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 975Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
976lists the supported emulations.
977
978@kindex -x
979@kindex --discard-all
980@cindex deleting local symbols
981@item -x
982@itemx --discard-all
983Delete all local symbols.
984
985@kindex -X
986@kindex --discard-locals
987@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 988@item -X
252b5132 989@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
990Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
993
994@kindex -y @var{symbol}
995@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996@cindex symbol tracing
997@item -y @var{symbol}
998@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006@kindex -Y @var{path}
1007@item -Y @var{path}
1008Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1013The recognized keywords are:
1014@table @samp
1015
1016@item combreloc
1017Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018lookup caching possible.
1019
1020@item defs
560e09e9 1021Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1022shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1023
6aa29e7b
JJ
1024@item execstack
1025Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
cd6d6c15
NC
1027@item initfirst
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033objects.
1034
1035@item interpose
1036Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037but the primary executable.
1038
5fa222e4
AM
1039@item lazy
1040When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043Lazy binding is the default.
1044
cd6d6c15
NC
1045@item loadfltr
1046Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047runtime.
1048
1049@item muldefs
1050Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052@item nocombreloc
1053Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055@item nocopyreloc
1056Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058@item nodefaultlib
1059Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062@item nodelete
1063Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065@item nodlopen
1066Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068@item nodump
1069Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
6aa29e7b
JJ
1071@item noexecstack
1072Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074@item norelro
1075Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
cd6d6c15
NC
1077@item now
1078When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082first called.
1083
1084@item origin
1085Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
6aa29e7b
JJ
1087@item relro
1088Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
24718e3b
L
1090@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
cd6d6c15
NC
1096@end table
1097
ece2d90e 1098Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1099
1100@kindex -(
1101@cindex groups of archives
1102@item -( @var{archives} -)
1103@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1104The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1105either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1106
1107The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1108references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1109the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1110archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1111object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1112would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1113they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1114resolved.
1115
1116Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1117it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1118more archives.
1119
69da35b5
NC
1120@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1123@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1124Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1125recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1126and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1127the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1128behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1129so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1130restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1131
4a43e768
AM
1132@kindex --as-needed
1133@kindex --no-as-needed
1134@item --as-needed
1135@itemx --no-as-needed
1136This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1137on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1138the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1139on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1140needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1141emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1142from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1143DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1144undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1145@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1146
e56f61be
L
1147@kindex --add-needed
1148@kindex --no-add-needed
1149@item --add-needed
1150@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1151These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1152their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1153options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1154and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1155
252b5132
RH
1156@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1157@item -assert @var{keyword}
1158This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1159
1160@kindex -Bdynamic
1161@kindex -dy
1162@kindex -call_shared
1163@item -Bdynamic
1164@itemx -dy
1165@itemx -call_shared
1166Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1167for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1168default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1169for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1170multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1171@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1172
a1ab1d2a
UD
1173@kindex -Bgroup
1174@item -Bgroup
1175Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1176section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1177object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1178@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1179only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1180
252b5132
RH
1181@kindex -Bstatic
1182@kindex -dn
1183@kindex -non_shared
1184@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1185@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1186@itemx -dn
1187@itemx -non_shared
1188@itemx -static
1189Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1190platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1191variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1192may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1193library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1194option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1195option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1196shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1197references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1198libraries.
252b5132
RH
1199
1200@kindex -Bsymbolic
1201@item -Bsymbolic
1202When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1203definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1204for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1205within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1206platforms which support shared libraries.
1207
40b36307
L
1208@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1209@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1210When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1211symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1212This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1213libraries.
1214
55255dae
L
1215@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1218typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1219global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1220within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1221to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1222in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1223which support shared libraries.
1224
1225The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1226scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1227
40b36307
L
1228@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1229@item --dynamic-list-data
1230Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1231
1232@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1235is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1236
0b8a70d9
L
1237@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1240
252b5132
RH
1241@kindex --check-sections
1242@kindex --no-check-sections
1243@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1244@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1245Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1246been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1247perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1248suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1249allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1250restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1251Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1252force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1253option.
252b5132 1254
ddbb8a31
NC
1255@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1258@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1259This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1260by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1261command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1262output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1263input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1264specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1265follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1266behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1267
1268This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1269libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1270the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1271DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1272required by the output binary. With
1273@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1274of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1275library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1276symbols.
1277
252b5132
RH
1278@cindex cross reference table
1279@kindex --cref
1280@item --cref
1281Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1282generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1283Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1284
1285The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1286easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1287sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1288symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1289definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1290
4818e05f
AM
1291@cindex common allocation
1292@kindex --no-define-common
1293@item --no-define-common
1294This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1295The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1296@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1297
1298The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1299the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1300of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1301forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1302Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1303from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1304This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1305and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1306duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1307paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1308
252b5132 1309@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1310@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1311@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1312Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1313address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1314times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1315limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1316context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1317symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1318constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1319using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1320Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1321space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1322@var{expression}.
1323
1324@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1325@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1326@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1327@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1328@itemx --no-demangle
1329These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1330and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1331present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1332underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1333mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1334different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1335to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1336demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1337is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1338
1339@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1340@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1341@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1342@item -I@var{file}
1343@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1344Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1345generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1346linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1347doing.
1348
7ce691ae 1349@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1350@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1351@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1352@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1353Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1354with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1355
252b5132
RH
1356@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1357@item --force-exe-suffix
1358Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1359
1360If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1361@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1362the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1363option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1364Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1365it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1366
1367@kindex --gc-sections
1368@kindex --no-gc-sections
1369@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1370@item --gc-sections
1371@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1372Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1373targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1374performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1375@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1376
d5465ba2
AM
1377@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1378examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1379symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1380command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1381referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1382libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1383referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1384the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1385relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1386
ac69cbc6 1387This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1388@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1389specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1390a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1391
c17d87de
NC
1392@kindex --print-gc-sections
1393@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1394@cindex garbage collection
1395@item --print-gc-sections
1396@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1397List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1398printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1399collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1400default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1401be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1402line.
1403
252b5132
RH
1404@cindex help
1405@cindex usage
1406@kindex --help
1407@item --help
1408Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1409
ea20a7da
CC
1410@kindex --target-help
1411@item --target-help
1412Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1413
2509a395
SL
1414@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1415@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1416Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1417@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1418
1419@cindex memory usage
1420@kindex --no-keep-memory
1421@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1422@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1423symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1424instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1425necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1426while linking a large executable.
1427
1428@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1429@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1430@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1431@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1432Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1433is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1434The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1435behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1436libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1437
aa713662
L
1438@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1439@kindex -z muldefs
1440@item --allow-multiple-definition
1441@itemx -z muldefs
1442Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1443report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1444first definition will be used.
1445
b79e8c78 1446@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1447@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1448@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1449@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1450Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1451This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1452determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1453shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1454how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1455
903249d7
NC
1456The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1457referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1458an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1459a shared library.
1460
1461The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1462libraries specified at link time are that:
1463
1464@itemize @bullet
1465@item
1466A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1467that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1468resolvable at load time.
1469@item
1470There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1471symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1472
1473The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1474select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1475architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1476appropriate memset function.
1477@end itemize
b79e8c78 1478
31941635
L
1479@kindex --no-undefined-version
1480@item --no-undefined-version
1481Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1482it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1483will be issued instead.
1484
3e3b46e5
PB
1485@kindex --default-symver
1486@item --default-symver
1487Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1488exported symbols.
1489
1490@kindex --default-imported-symver
1491@item --default-imported-symver
1492Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1493imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1494
252b5132
RH
1495@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1496@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1497Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1498files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1499been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1500This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1501errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1502have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1503inappropriate.
1504
fe7929ce
AM
1505@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1507Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1508library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1509
252b5132
RH
1510@kindex --no-whole-archive
1511@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1512Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1513archive files.
1514
1515@cindex output file after errors
1516@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1517@item --noinhibit-exec
1518Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1519Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1520errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1521when it issues any error whatsoever.
1522
0a9c1c8e
CD
1523@kindex -nostdlib
1524@item -nostdlib
1525Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1526command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1527(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1528
252b5132 1529@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1530@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1531@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1532@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1533file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1534@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1535object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1536object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1537should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1538usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1539name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1540list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1541command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1542this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1543@end ifclear
1544
36af4a4e
JJ
1545@kindex -pie
1546@kindex --pic-executable
1547@item -pie
1548@itemx --pic-executable
1549@cindex position independent executables
1550Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1551ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1552libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1553address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1554normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1555defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1556
252b5132
RH
1557@kindex -qmagic
1558@item -qmagic
1559This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1560
1561@kindex -Qy
1562@item -Qy
1563This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1564
1565@kindex --relax
1566@cindex synthesizing linker
1567@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1568@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1569@item --relax
28d5f677 1570@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1571An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1572@ifset GENERIC
1573This option is only supported on a few targets.
1574@end ifset
1575@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1576@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1577@end ifset
1578@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1579@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1580@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1581@ifset XTENSA
1582@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1583@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1584@ifset M68HC11
1585@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1586@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1587@ifset POWERPC
1588@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1589@end ifset
252b5132 1590
28d5f677
NC
1591On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1592global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1593addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1594synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1595instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1596
1597On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1598debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1599@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1600This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1601family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1602@end ifset
1603
1604@ifset GENERIC
1605On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1606but ignored.
1607@end ifset
1608
28d5f677
NC
1609On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1610@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1611
252b5132
RH
1612@cindex retaining specified symbols
1613@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1614@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1615@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1616@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1617Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1618discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1619symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1620@ifset GENERIC
1621(such as VxWorks)
1622@end ifset
1623where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1624run-time memory.
1625
1626@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1627or symbols needed for relocations.
1628
1629You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1630line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1631
1632@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1633@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1634@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1635@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1636Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1637linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1638arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1639them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1640also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1641objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1642@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1643ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1644@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1645
ff5dcc92 1646The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1647SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1648@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1649runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1650options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1651gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1652file systems.
252b5132 1653
ff5dcc92 1654For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1655followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1656the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1657@end ifset
1658
1659@ifset GENERIC
1660@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1661@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1662@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1663When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1664happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1665of the input files.
1666
1667When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1668non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1669shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1670explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1671specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1672@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1673either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1674appearing multiple times.
1675
28c309a2
NC
1676This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1677that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1678is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1679runtime linker would do.
1680
252b5132 1681The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1682libraries:
252b5132
RH
1683@enumerate
1684@item
ff5dcc92 1685Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1686@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1687Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1688between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1689specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1690used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1691at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1692by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1693the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1694@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1695On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1696@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1697environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1698@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1699On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1700directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1701@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1702For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1703variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1704@item
ec4eb78a
L
1705For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1706@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1707libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1708@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1709@item
252b5132
RH
1710The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1711@item
1712For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1713exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1714@end enumerate
1715
1716If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1717warning and continue with the link.
1718@end ifset
1719
1720@kindex -shared
1721@kindex -Bshareable
1722@item -shared
1723@itemx -Bshareable
1724@cindex shared libraries
1725Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1726and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1727shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1728undefined symbols in the link.
1729
252b5132 1730@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1731@item --sort-common
1732@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1733@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1734This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1735ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1736sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1737eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1738between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1739specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1740
2509a395
SL
1741@kindex --sort-section=name
1742@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1743This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1744patterns in the linker script.
1745
2509a395
SL
1746@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1747@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1748This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1749patterns in the linker script.
1750
252b5132 1751@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1752@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1753Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1754each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1755size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1756
1757@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1758@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1759Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1760output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1761This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1762certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1763cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1764that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1765support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1766input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1767more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1768many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1769
1770@kindex --stats
1771@item --stats
1772Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1773as execution time and memory usage.
1774
2509a395 1775@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1776@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1777Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1778configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1779that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1780
252b5132
RH
1781@kindex --traditional-format
1782@cindex traditional format
1783@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1784For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1785the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1786use the traditional format instead.
1787
1788@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1789For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1790symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1791full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1792@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1793trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1794combine duplicate entries.
1795
2509a395
SL
1796@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1797@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1798Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1799address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1800times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1801line.
1802@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1803for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1804@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1805should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1806sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1807
2509a395
SL
1808@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1809@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1810@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1811@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1812@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1813@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1814@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1815Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1816@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1817
2509a395
SL
1818@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1819@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1820@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1821When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1822of the first byte of the text segment.
1823
560e09e9
NC
1824@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1825@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1826Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1827values for @samp{method}:
1828
1829@table @samp
1830@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1831Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1832
1833@item report-all
da8bce14 1834Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1835
1836@item ignore-in-object-files
1837Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1838ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1839
1840@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1841Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1842ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1843when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1844libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1845command line.
1846@end table
1847
1848The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1849by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1850
1851Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1852unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1853can change this to a warning.
1854
1715a13c
L
1855@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1856@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1857@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1858@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1859Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1860supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1861the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1862argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1863
1864@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1865@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1866@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1867Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1868used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1869about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1870is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1871see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1872use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1873symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1874@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1875
7ce691ae 1876@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1877@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1878@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1879@item --warn-common
1880Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1881a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1882but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1883you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1884Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1885warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1886
1887There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1888
1889@table @samp
1890@item int i = 1;
1891A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1892file.
1893
1894@item extern int i;
1895An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1896There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1897variable somewhere.
1898
1899@item int i;
1900A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1901variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1902The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1903single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1904size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1905a definition of the same variable.
1906@end table
1907
1908The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1909Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1910just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1911encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1912a common symbol.
1913
1914@enumerate
1915@item
1916Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1917definition for the symbol.
1918@smallexample
1919@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1920 overridden by definition
1921@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1922@end smallexample
1923
1924@item
1925Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1926the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1927except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1928@smallexample
1929@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1930 overriding common
1931@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1932@end smallexample
1933
1934@item
1935Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1936@smallexample
1937@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1938 of `@var{symbol}'
1939@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1940@end smallexample
1941
1942@item
1943Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1944@smallexample
1945@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1946 overridden by larger common
1947@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1948@end smallexample
1949
1950@item
1951Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1952the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1953encountered in a different order.
1954@smallexample
1955@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1956 overriding smaller common
1957@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1958@end smallexample
1959@end enumerate
1960
1961@kindex --warn-constructors
1962@item --warn-constructors
1963Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1964object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1965detect the use of global constructors.
1966
1967@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1968@item --warn-multiple-gp
1969Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1970This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1971Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1972section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1973of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1974base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1975base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1976bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1977large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1978values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1979option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1980
1981@kindex --warn-once
1982@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1983@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1984@item --warn-once
1985Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1986which refers to it.
1987
1988@kindex --warn-section-align
1989@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1990@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1991@item --warn-section-align
1992Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1993alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1994The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1995is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1996the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1997
8fdd7217
NC
1998@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1999@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2000Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2001
a0c402a5
L
2002@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2003@item --warn-alternate-em
2004Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2005
560e09e9
NC
2006@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2007@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2008If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2009@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2010This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2011
2012@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2013@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2014This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2015it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2016
252b5132
RH
2017@kindex --whole-archive
2018@cindex including an entire archive
2019@item --whole-archive
2020For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2021@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2022in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2023files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2024library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2025library. This option may be used more than once.
2026
7ec229ce 2027Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2028about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2029Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2030list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2031your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2032
2509a395
SL
2033@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2034@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2035Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2036@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2037undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2038@var{symbol}.
2039
2040This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2041wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2042wishes to call the system function, it should call
2043@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2044
2045Here is a trivial example:
2046
2047@smallexample
2048void *
cc2f008e 2049__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2050@{
cc2f008e 2051 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2052 return __real_malloc (c);
2053@}
2054@end smallexample
2055
ff5dcc92 2056If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2057all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2058instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2059call the real @code{malloc} function.
2060
2061You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2062links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2063you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2064file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2065call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2066
6aa29e7b
JJ
2067@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2068@item --eh-frame-hdr
2069Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2070@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2071
6c1439be
L
2072@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2073@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2074@item --enable-new-dtags
2075@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2076This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2077systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2078@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2079If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2080created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2081those options are only available for ELF systems.
2082
2d643429 2083@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2084@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2085Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2086close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2087time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2088increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2089value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2090
fdc90cb4
JJ
2091@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2092@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2093Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2094@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2095new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2096the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2097hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2098
35835446
JR
2099@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2100@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2101This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2102linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2103for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2104about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2105
4f9c04f7 2106Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21071021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2108run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2109has been used.
2110
2111The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2112enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2113
c0065db7
RM
2114@kindex --build-id
2115@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2116@item --build-id
2117@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2118Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2119The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2120file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2121@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2122parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2123@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2124@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2125an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2126characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2127omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2128
2129The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2130that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2131unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2132to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2133file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2134string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2135
2136Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2137@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2138@end table
2139
0285c67d
NC
2140@c man end
2141
36f63dca 2142@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2143
0285c67d
NC
2144@c man begin OPTIONS
2145
ff5dcc92 2146The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2147the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2148normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2149use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2150@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2151like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2152symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2153object file).
2154
2155In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2156support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2157PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2158values by either a space or an equals sign.
2159
ff5dcc92 2160@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2161
2162@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2163@item --add-stdcall-alias
2164If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2165as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2166[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2167
2168@kindex --base-file
2169@item --base-file @var{file}
2170Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2171addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2172@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2173[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2174
2175@kindex --dll
2176@item --dll
2177Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2178@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2179file.
bb10df36 2180[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2181
88183869
DK
2182@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2183@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2184@item --enable-long-section-names
2185@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2186The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2187the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2188for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2189fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2190to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2191allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2192disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2193generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2194as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2195with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2196GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2197information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2198option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2199section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2200when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2201image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2202[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2203
252b5132
RH
2204@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2205@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2206@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2207@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2208If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2209do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2210only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2211resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2212undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2213@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2214to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2215warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2216import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2217to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2218feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2219@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2220mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2221[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2222
522f09cd
KT
2223@kindex --leading-underscore
2224@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2225@item --leading-underscore
2226@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2227For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2228in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2229disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2230
252b5132
RH
2231@cindex DLLs, creating
2232@kindex --export-all-symbols
2233@item --export-all-symbols
2234If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2235be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2236otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2237explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2238attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2239option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2240@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2241@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2242exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2243re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2244such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2245@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2246@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2247Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2248not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2249extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2250(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2251These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2252@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2253@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2254@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2255@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2256[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2257
2258@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2259@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2260Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2261exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2262[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2263
2927aaca
NC
2264@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2265@item --exclude-all-symbols
2266Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2267[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2268
252b5132
RH
2269@kindex --file-alignment
2270@item --file-alignment
2271Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2272file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2273512.
bb10df36 2274[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2275
2276@cindex heap size
2277@kindex --heap
2278@item --heap @var{reserve}
2279@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2280Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2281to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2282committed.
bb10df36 2283[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2284
2285@cindex image base
2286@kindex --image-base
2287@item --image-base @var{value}
2288Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2289the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2290is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2291your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2292other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2293for dlls.
bb10df36 2294[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2295
2296@kindex --kill-at
2297@item --kill-at
2298If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2299symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2300[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2301
26d2d8a2
BF
2302@kindex --large-address-aware
2303@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2304If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2305header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2306greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2307or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2308section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2309[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2310
252b5132
RH
2311@kindex --major-image-version
2312@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2313Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2314[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2315
2316@kindex --major-os-version
2317@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2318Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2319[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2320
2321@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2322@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2323Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2324[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2325
2326@kindex --minor-image-version
2327@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2328Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2329[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2330
2331@kindex --minor-os-version
2332@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2333Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2334[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2335
2336@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2337@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2338Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2339[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2340
2341@cindex DEF files, creating
2342@cindex DLLs, creating
2343@kindex --output-def
2344@item --output-def @var{file}
2345The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2346file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2347(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2348library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2349automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2350[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2351
b044cda1
CW
2352@cindex DLLs, creating
2353@kindex --out-implib
2354@item --out-implib @var{file}
2355The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2356import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2357import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2358may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2359makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2360creation step.
bb10df36 2361[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2362
2363@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2364@item --enable-auto-image-base
2365Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2366using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2367from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2368collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2369avoided.
bb10df36 2370[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2371
2372@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2373@item --disable-auto-image-base
2374Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2375user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2376default.
bb10df36 2377[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2378
2379@cindex DLLs, linking to
2380@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2381@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2382When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2383search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2384@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2385between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2386uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2387@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2388[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2389
2390@kindex --enable-auto-import
2391@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2392Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2393DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2394building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2395'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2396to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2397specification published by Microsoft.
2398
e2a83dd0
NC
2399Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2400data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2401placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2402around a problem with consts that is described here:
2403http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2404
4d8907ac
DS
2405Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2406see this message:
0d888aac 2407
ece2d90e 2408"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2409documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2410
ece2d90e
NC
2411This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2412ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2413allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2414fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2415constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2416multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2417this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2418of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2419the warning, and exit.
2420
2421There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2422data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2423
2fa9fc65
NC
2424One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2425of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2426this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2427
c0065db7
RM
2428A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2429that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2430there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2431a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2432
2433@example
2434extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2435extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2436 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2437@end example
2438
2439or
2440
2441@example
2442extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2443extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2444 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2445@end example
2446
c0065db7 2447For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2448is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2449
2450@example
2451extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2452extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2453 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2454@end example
2455
c406afaf
NC
2456or
2457
2458@example
2459extern long long extern_ll;
2460extern_ll -->
2461 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2462@end example
2463
2fa9fc65 2464A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2465'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2466@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2467requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2468building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2469merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2470between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2471constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2472
2473Original:
2474@example
2475--foo.h
2476extern int arr[];
2477--foo.c
2478#include "foo.h"
2479void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2480 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2481@}
2482@end example
2483
2484Solution 1:
2485@example
2486--foo.h
2487extern int arr[];
2488--foo.c
2489#include "foo.h"
2490void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2491 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2492 volatile int *parr = arr;
2493 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2494@}
2495@end example
2496
2497Solution 2:
2498@example
2499--foo.h
2500/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2501#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2502 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2503#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2504#else
2505#define FOO_IMPORT
2506#endif
2507extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2508--foo.c
2509#include "foo.h"
2510void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2511 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2512@}
2513@end example
2514
c0065db7 2515A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2516library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2517for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2518functions).
bb10df36 2519[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2520
2521@kindex --disable-auto-import
2522@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2523Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2524@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2525[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2526
2fa9fc65
NC
2527@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2528@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2529If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2530that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2531a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2532environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2533[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2534
2535@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2536@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2537Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2538DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2539[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2540
b044cda1
CW
2541@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2542@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2543Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2544[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2545
252b5132
RH
2546@kindex --section-alignment
2547@item --section-alignment
2548Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2549addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2550[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2551
2552@cindex stack size
2553@kindex --stack
2554@item --stack @var{reserve}
2555@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2556Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2557to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2558committed.
bb10df36 2559[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2560
2561@kindex --subsystem
2562@item --subsystem @var{which}
2563@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2564@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2565Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2566legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2567@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2568the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2569@var{which}.
bb10df36 2570[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2571
2f563b51
DK
2572The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2573of the PE file header:
2574[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2575
2576@kindex --dynamicbase
2577@item --dynamicbase
2578The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2579randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2580Vista for i386 PE targets.
2581
2582@kindex --forceinteg
2583@item --forceinteg
2584Code integrity checks are enforced.
2585
2586@kindex --nxcompat
2587@item --nxcompat
2588The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2589This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2590
2591@kindex --no-isolation
2592@item --no-isolation
2593Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2594
2595@kindex --no-seh
2596@item --no-seh
2597The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2598this image.
2599
2600@kindex --no-bind
2601@item --no-bind
2602Do not bind this image.
2603
2604@kindex --wdmdriver
2605@item --wdmdriver
2606The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2607
2608@kindex --tsaware
2609@item --tsaware
2610The image is Terminal Server aware.
2611
252b5132
RH
2612@end table
2613
0285c67d
NC
2614@c man end
2615
ac145307
BS
2616@ifset C6X
2617@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2618
2619@c man begin OPTIONS
2620
2621The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2622libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2623all executables use an index of 0.
2624
2625@table @gcctabopt
2626
2627@kindex --dsbt-size
2628@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2629This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2630or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2631entries.
2632
2633@kindex --dsbt-index
2634@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2635This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2636to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2637executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2638@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2639
fbd9ad90
PB
2640@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2641The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2642exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2643
ac145307
BS
2644@end table
2645
2646@c man end
2647@end ifset
2648
93fd0973
SC
2649@ifset M68HC11
2650@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2651
2652@c man begin OPTIONS
2653
2654The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2655memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2656
2657@table @gcctabopt
2658
2659@kindex --no-trampoline
2660@item --no-trampoline
2661This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2662is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2663instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2664
2665@kindex --bank-window
2666@item --bank-window @var{name}
2667This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2668the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2669The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2670paging and addresses within the memory window.
2671
2672@end table
2673
2674@c man end
2675@end ifset
2676
7fb9f789
NC
2677@ifset M68K
2678@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2679
2680@c man begin OPTIONS
2681
2682The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2683when linking for 68K targets.
2684
2685@table @gcctabopt
2686
2687@kindex --got
2688@item --got=@var{type}
2689This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2690@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2691@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2692Info entry for @file{ld}.
2693
2694@end table
2695
2696@c man end
2697@end ifset
2698
252b5132
RH
2699@ifset UsesEnvVars
2700@node Environment
2701@section Environment Variables
2702
0285c67d
NC
2703@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2704
560e09e9 2705You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2706@ifclear SingleFormat
2707@code{GNUTARGET},
2708@end ifclear
2709@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2710
36f63dca 2711@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2712@kindex GNUTARGET
2713@cindex default input format
2714@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2715use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2716of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2717@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2718of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2719attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2720this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2721there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2722object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2723BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2724in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2725@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2726
2727@kindex LDEMULATION
2728@cindex default emulation
2729@cindex emulation, default
2730@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2731@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2732behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2733available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2734the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2735variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2736linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2737
2738@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2739@cindex demangling, default
2740Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2741@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2742default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2743a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2744may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2745options.
2746
0285c67d
NC
2747@c man end
2748@end ifset
2749
252b5132
RH
2750@node Scripts
2751@chapter Linker Scripts
2752
2753@cindex scripts
2754@cindex linker scripts
2755@cindex command files
2756Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2757written in the linker command language.
2758
2759The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2760the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2761the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2762more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2763direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2764described below.
2765
2766The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2767yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2768linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2769to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2770such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2771
2772You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2773line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2774default linker script.
2775
2776You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2777to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2778Linker Scripts}.
2779
2780@menu
2781* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2782* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2783* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2784* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2785* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2786* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2787* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2788* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2789* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2790* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2791* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2792@end menu
2793
2794@node Basic Script Concepts
2795@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2796@cindex linker script concepts
2797We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2798describe the linker script language.
2799
2800The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2801file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2802@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2803The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2804purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2805among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2806section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2807in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2808
2809Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2810also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2811contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2812the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2813A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2814area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2815loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2816which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2817of debugging information.
2818
2819Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2820first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2821the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2822@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2823section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2824same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2825is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2826(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2827based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2828RAM address would be the VMA.
2829
2830You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2831program with the @samp{-h} option.
2832
2833Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2834@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2835has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2836information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2837will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2838static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2839referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2840
2841You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2842program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2843option.
2844
2845@node Script Format
2846@section Linker Script Format
2847@cindex linker script format
2848Linker scripts are text files.
2849
2850You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2851either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2852symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2853generally ignored.
2854
2855Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2856If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2857otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2858double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2859file name.
2860
2861You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2862@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2863to whitespace.
2864
2865@node Simple Example
2866@section Simple Linker Script Example
2867@cindex linker script example
2868@cindex example of linker script
2869Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2870
2871The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2872@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2873memory layout of the output file.
2874
2875The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2876describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2877code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2878@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2879Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2880your input files.
2881
2882For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28830x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2884linker script which will do that:
2885@smallexample
2886SECTIONS
2887@{
2888 . = 0x10000;
2889 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2890 . = 0x8000000;
2891 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2892 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2893@}
2894@end smallexample
2895
2896You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2897followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2898descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2899
252b5132
RH
2900The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2901sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2902counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2903other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2904current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2905incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2906@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2907
2908The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2909required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2910after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2911which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2912wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2913means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2914
2915Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2916@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2917@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2918
2919The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2920the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2921at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2922output section, the value of the location counter will be
2923@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2924effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2925immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2926
2927The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2928alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2929example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2930sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2931may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2932sections.
2933
2934That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2935
2936@node Simple Commands
2937@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2938@cindex linker script simple commands
2939In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2940
2941@menu
2942* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2943* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2944@ifclear SingleFormat
2945* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2946@end ifclear
2947
4a93e180 2948* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2949* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2950@end menu
2951
2952@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2953@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2954@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2955@cindex start of execution
2956@cindex first instruction
2957@cindex entry point
2958The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2959point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2960entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2961@smallexample
2962ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2963@end smallexample
2964
2965There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2966entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2967stopping when one of them succeeds:
2968@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2969@item
252b5132 2970the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2971@item
252b5132 2972the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2973@item
3ab904c4
NC
2974the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2975targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2976check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2977@item
252b5132 2978the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2979@item
252b5132
RH
2980The address @code{0}.
2981@end itemize
2982
2983@node File Commands
36f63dca 2984@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2985@cindex linker script file commands
2986Several linker script commands deal with files.
2987
2988@table @code
2989@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2990@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2991@cindex including a linker script
2992Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2993be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2994with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
299510 levels deep.
2996
4006703d
NS
2997You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2998@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2999
252b5132
RH
3000@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3001@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3002@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3003@cindex input files in linker scripts
3004@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3005@cindex linker script input object files
3006The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3007in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3008
3009For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3010a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3011then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3012
3013In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3014script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3015
e3f2db7f
AO
3016In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3017with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3018located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3019for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3020open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3021linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3022description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3023
ff5dcc92 3024If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3025name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3026@samp{-l}.
3027
3028When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3029files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3030script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3031
3032@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3033@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3034@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3035@cindex grouping input files
3036The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3037files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3038new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3039in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3040
b717d30e
JJ
3041@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3042@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3043@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3044This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3045commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3046as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3047with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3048when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3049@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3050and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3051setting afterwards.
3052
252b5132
RH
3053@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3054@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3055@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3056The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3057@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3058@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3059Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3060precedence.
3061
3062You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3063output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3064
3065@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3066@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3067@cindex library search path in linker script
3068@cindex archive search path in linker script
3069@cindex search path in linker script
3070The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3071@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3072@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3073on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3074are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3075the command line option are searched first.
3076
3077@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3078@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3079@cindex first input file
3080The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3081that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3082though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3083when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3084first file.
3085@end table
3086
3087@ifclear SingleFormat
3088@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3089@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3090A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3091
3092@table @code
3093@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3094@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3095@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3096@cindex output file format in linker script
3097The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3098output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3099exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3100(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3101line option takes precedence.
3102
3103You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3104formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3105This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3106desired endianness.
3107
3108If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3109will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3110output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3111used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3112
3113For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3114command:
3115@smallexample
3116OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3117@end smallexample
3118This says that the default format for the output file is
3119@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3120option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3121format.
3122
3123@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3124@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3125@cindex input file format in linker script
3126The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3127files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3128This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3129(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3130is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3131command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3132@end table
3133@end ifclear
3134
4a93e180
NC
3135@node REGION_ALIAS
3136@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3137@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3138@cindex region alias
3139@cindex region names
3140
3141Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3142@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3143
3144@smallexample
3145REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3146@end smallexample
3147
3148The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3149memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3150to memory regions. An example follows.
3151
3152Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3153memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3154that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3155non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3156access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3157read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3158sections:
3159
3160@itemize @bullet
3161@item
3162@code{.text} program code;
3163@item
3164@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3165@item
3166@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3167@item
3168@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3169@end itemize
3170
3171The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3172part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3173output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3174systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3175@code{C}:
3176@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3177@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3178@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3179@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3180@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3181@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3182@end multitable
3183The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3184loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3185the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3186the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3187
3188The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3189includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3190memory layout:
3191@smallexample
3192INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3193
3194SECTIONS
3195 @{
3196 .text :
3197 @{
3198 *(.text)
3199 @} > REGION_TEXT
3200 .rodata :
3201 @{
3202 *(.rodata)
3203 rodata_end = .;
3204 @} > REGION_RODATA
3205 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3206 @{
3207 data_start = .;
3208 *(.data)
3209 @} > REGION_DATA
3210 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3211 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3212 .bss :
3213 @{
3214 *(.bss)
3215 @} > REGION_BSS
3216 @}
3217@end smallexample
3218
3219Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3220regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3221variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3222@table @code
3223@item A
3224Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3225@smallexample
3226MEMORY
3227 @{
3228 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3229 @}
3230
3231REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3232REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3233REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3234REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3235@end smallexample
3236@item B
3237Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3238into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3239@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3240@smallexample
3241MEMORY
3242 @{
3243 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3244 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3245 @}
3246
3247REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3248REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3249REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3250REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3251@end smallexample
3252@item C
3253Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3254@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3255initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3256system start into the @code{RAM}.
3257@smallexample
3258MEMORY
3259 @{
3260 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3261 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3262 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3263 @}
3264
3265REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3266REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3267REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3268REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3269@end smallexample
3270@end table
3271
3272It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3273@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3274necessary:
3275@smallexample
3276#include <string.h>
3277
3278extern char data_start [];
3279extern char data_size [];
3280extern char data_load_start [];
3281
3282void copy_data(void)
3283@{
3284 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3285 @{
3286 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3287 @}
3288@}
3289@end smallexample
3290
252b5132 3291@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3292@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3293There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3294
3295@table @code
3296@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3297@kindex ASSERT
3298@cindex assertion in linker script
3299Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3300with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3301
3302@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3303@kindex EXTERN
3304@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3305Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3306symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3307modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3308each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3309command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3310
3311@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3312@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3313@cindex common allocation in linker script
3314This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3315to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3316output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3317
4818e05f
AM
3318@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3319@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3320@cindex common allocation in linker script
3321This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3322command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3323to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3324
53d25da6
AM
3325@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3326@kindex INSERT
3327@cindex insert user script into default script
3328This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3329augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3330inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3331@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3332default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3333sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3334linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3335insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3336linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3337default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3338of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3339to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3340is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3341
3342@smallexample
3343SECTIONS
3344@{
3345 OVERLAY :
3346 @{
3347 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3348 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3349 @}
3350@}
3351INSERT AFTER .text;
3352@end smallexample
3353
252b5132
RH
3354@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3355@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3356@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3357This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3358references among certain output sections.
3359
3360In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3361using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3362will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3363errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3364a function defined in the other section.
3365
3366The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3367@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3368an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3369@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3370names.
3371
3372@ifclear SingleFormat
3373@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3374@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3375@cindex machine architecture
3376@cindex architecture
3377Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3378of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3379architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3380the @samp{-f} option.
3381@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3382
3383@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3384@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3385This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3386@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3387in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3388@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3389@end table
3390
3391@node Assignments
3392@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3393@cindex assignment in scripts
3394@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3395@cindex variables, defining
3396You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3397the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3398
3399@menu
3400* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3401* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3402* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3403* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3404@end menu
3405
3406@node Simple Assignments
3407@subsection Simple Assignments
3408
3409You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3410
3411@table @code
3412@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3413@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3414@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3415@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3416@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3417@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3418@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3419@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3420@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3421@end table
3422
3423The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3424@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3425defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3426
3427The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3428may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3429
3430The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3431
3432Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3433
3434You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3435statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3436section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3437
3438The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3439expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3440
3441Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3442assignments may be used:
3443
3444@smallexample
3445floating_point = 0;
3446SECTIONS
3447@{
3448 .text :
3449 @{
3450 *(.text)
3451 _etext = .;
3452 @}
156e34dd 3453 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3454 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3455@}
3456@end smallexample
3457@noindent
3458In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3459zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3460the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3461defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3462upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3463
3464@node PROVIDE
3465@subsection PROVIDE
3466@cindex PROVIDE
3467In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3468only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3469the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3470@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3471@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3472@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3473@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3474@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3475
3476Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3477@smallexample
3478SECTIONS
3479@{
3480 .text :
3481 @{
3482 *(.text)
3483 _etext = .;
3484 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3485 @}
3486@}
3487@end smallexample
3488
3489In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3490underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3491the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3492underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3493If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3494linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3495
7af8e998
L
3496@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3497@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3498@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3499Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3500hidden and won't be exported.
3501
73ae6183
NC
3502@node Source Code Reference
3503@subsection Source Code Reference
3504
3505Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3506intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3507a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3508symbol that does not have a value.
3509
3510Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3511transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3512stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3513prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3514mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3515of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3516variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3517linker script variable might be referred to as:
3518
3519@smallexample
3520 extern int foo;
3521@end smallexample
3522
3523But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3524
3525@smallexample
3526 _foo = 1000;
3527@end smallexample
3528
3529In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3530transformation has taken place.
3531
3532When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3533things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3534in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3535second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3536table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3537contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3538value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3539
3540@smallexample
3541 int foo = 1000;
3542@end smallexample
3543
3544creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3545holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3546number 1000 is initially stored.
3547
3548When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3549first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3550memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3551So:
3552
3553@smallexample
3554 foo = 1;
3555@end smallexample
3556
3557looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3558associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3559address. Whereas:
3560
3561@smallexample
3562 int * a = & foo;
3563@end smallexample
3564
3565looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3566and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3567the variable @samp{a}.
3568
3569Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3570the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3571an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3572
3573@smallexample
3574 foo = 1000;
3575@end smallexample
3576
3577creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3578the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3579address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3580linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3581access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3582
3583Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3584you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3585use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3586section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3587linker script contains these declarations:
3588
3589@smallexample
3590@group
3591 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3592 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3593 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3594@end group
3595@end smallexample
3596
3597Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3598
3599@smallexample
3600@group
3601 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3602
73ae6183
NC
3603 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3604@end group
3605@end smallexample
3606
3607Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3608
252b5132 3609@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3610@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3611@kindex SECTIONS
3612The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3613into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3614
3615The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3616@smallexample
3617SECTIONS
3618@{
3619 @var{sections-command}
3620 @var{sections-command}
3621 @dots{}
3622@}
3623@end smallexample
3624
3625Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3626
3627@itemize @bullet
3628@item
3629an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3630@item
3631a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3632@item
3633an output section description
3634@item
3635an overlay description
3636@end itemize
3637
3638The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3639@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3640those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3641understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3642the layout of the output file.
3643
3644Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3645below.
3646
3647If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3648linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3649section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3650input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3651example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3652in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3653
3654@menu
3655* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3656* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3657* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3658* Input Section:: Input section description
3659* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3660* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3661* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3662* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3663* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3664@end menu
3665
3666@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3667@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3668The full description of an output section looks like this:
3669@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3670@group
7e7d5768 3671@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3672 [AT(@var{lma})]
3673 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3674 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3675 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3676 @{
3677 @var{output-section-command}
3678 @var{output-section-command}
3679 @dots{}
562d3460 3680 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3681@end group
3682@end smallexample
3683
3684Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3685
3686The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3687name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3688The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3689
3690Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3691
3692@itemize @bullet
3693@item
3694a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3695@item
3696an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3697@item
3698data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3699@item
3700a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3701@end itemize
3702
3703@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3704@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3705@cindex name, section
3706@cindex section name
3707The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3708meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3709support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3710must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3711example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3712output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3713names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3714quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3715characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3716commas must be quoted.
3717
3718The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3719Discarding}.
3720
3721@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3722@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3723@cindex address, section
3724@cindex section address
3725The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3726address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3727is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3728
3729If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3730section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3731to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3732alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3733contained within the output section.
3734
3735The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3736
3737@itemize @bullet
3738@item
3739If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3740is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3741in that region.
3742
3743@item
3744If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3745regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3746section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3747be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3748
3749@item
3750If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3751the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3752counter.
3753@end itemize
3754
3755@noindent
3756For example:
3757
252b5132
RH
3758@smallexample
3759.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3760@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3761
252b5132
RH
3762@noindent
3763and
ea5cae92 3764
252b5132
RH
3765@smallexample
3766.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3767@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3768
252b5132
RH
3769@noindent
3770are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3771@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3772counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3773counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3774input sections.
252b5132
RH
3775
3776The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3777For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3778so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3779do something like this:
3780@smallexample
3781.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3782@end smallexample
3783@noindent
3784This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3785aligned upward to the specified value.
3786
3787Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3788location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3789sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3790
3791@node Input Section
36f63dca 3792@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3793@cindex input sections
3794@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3795The most common output section command is an input section description.
3796
3797The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3798You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3799in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3800map the input files into your memory layout.
3801
3802@menu
3803* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3804* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3805* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3806* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3807* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3808@end menu
3809
3810@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3811@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3812@cindex input section basics
3813An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3814by a list of section names in parentheses.
3815
3816The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3817describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3818
3819The most common input section description is to include all input
3820sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3821include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3822@smallexample
3823*(.text)
3824@end smallexample
3825@noindent
18625d54
CM
3826Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3827of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3828match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3829example:
252b5132 3830@smallexample
b4346c09 3831*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3832@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3833will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3834@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3835
3836There are two ways to include more than one section:
3837@smallexample
3838*(.text .rdata)
3839*(.text) *(.rdata)
3840@end smallexample
3841@noindent
3842The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3843@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3844first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3845they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3846@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3847@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3848
3849You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3850You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3851needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3852@smallexample
3853data.o(.data)
3854@end smallexample
3855
967928e9
AM
3856You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3857matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3858with no whitespace around the colon.
3859
3860@table @samp
3861@item archive:file
3862matches file within archive
3863@item archive:
3864matches the whole archive
3865@item :file
3866matches file but not one in an archive
3867@end table
3868
3869Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3870wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3871single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3872@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3873within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3874also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3875other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3876from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3877command.
3878
252b5132
RH
3879If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3880the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3881commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3882@smallexample
3883data.o
3884@end smallexample
3885
967928e9
AM
3886When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3887and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3888characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3889name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3890did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3891though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3892@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3893the archive search path.
3894
3895@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3896@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3897@cindex input section wildcards
3898@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3899@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3900@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3901In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3902name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3903
3904The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3905pattern for the file name.
3906
3907The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3908
3909@table @samp
3910@item *
3911matches any number of characters
3912@item ?
3913matches any single character
3914@item [@var{chars}]
3915matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3916character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3917@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3918@item \
3919quotes the following character
3920@end table
3921
3922When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3923will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3924Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3925exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3926@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3927a @samp{/} character.
3928
3929File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3930specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3931does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3932
3933If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3934appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3935will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3936sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3937@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3938@smallexample
3939.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3940.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3941@end smallexample
3942
bcaa7b3e 3943@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3944Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3945in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3946this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3947pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3948@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3949into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3950
bcaa7b3e
L
3951@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3952@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3953difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3954ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3955
02ecc8e9
L
3956@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
3957@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3958difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
3959ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
3960encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
3961
bcaa7b3e
L
3962@cindex SORT
3963@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3964
3965When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3966can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3967
3968@enumerate
3969@item
3970@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3971It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3972sections have the same name.
3973@item
3974@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3975It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3976sections have the same alignment.
3977@item
c0065db7 3978@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3979treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3980@item
3981@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3982is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3983@item
3984All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3985@end enumerate
3986
3987When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3988section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3989takes precedence over the command line option.
3990
3991If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3992command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3993treated as nested sorting command.
3994
3995@enumerate
3996@item
3997@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3998@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3999@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4000@item
4001@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4002@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4003@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4004@end enumerate
4005
4006If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4007command line option will be ignored.
4008
252b5132
RH
4009If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4010@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4011precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4012
4013This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4014files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4015sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4016The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4017with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4018linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4019@smallexample
4020@group
4021SECTIONS @{
4022 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4023 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4024 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4025 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4026@}
4027@end group
4028@end smallexample
4029
4030@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4031@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4032@cindex common symbol placement
4033@cindex uninitialized data placement
4034A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4035file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4036linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4037named @samp{COMMON}.
4038
4039You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4040other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4041particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4042input files are placed in another section.
4043
4044In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4045@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4046@smallexample
4047.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4048@end smallexample
4049
4050@cindex scommon section
4051@cindex small common symbols
4052Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4053example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4054symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4055different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4056the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4057symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4058to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4059locations.
4060
4061@cindex [COMMON]
4062You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4063notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4064@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4065
4066@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4067@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4068@cindex KEEP
4069@cindex garbage collection
4070When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4071it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4072This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4073with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4074@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4075
4076@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4077@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4078The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4079to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4080start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4081@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4082follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4083@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4084@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4085All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4086files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4087
4088@smallexample
4089@group
4090SECTIONS @{
4091 outputa 0x10000 :
4092 @{
4093 all.o
4094 foo.o (.input1)
4095 @}
36f63dca
NC
4096@end group
4097@group
252b5132
RH
4098 outputb :
4099 @{
4100 foo.o (.input2)
4101 foo1.o (.input1)
4102 @}
36f63dca
NC
4103@end group
4104@group
252b5132
RH
4105 outputc :
4106 @{
4107 *(.input1)
4108 *(.input2)
4109 @}
4110@}
4111@end group
a1ab1d2a 4112@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4113
4114@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4115@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4116@cindex data
4117@cindex section data
4118@cindex output section data
4119@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4120@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4121@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4122@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4123@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4124You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4125@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4126an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4127parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4128value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4129counter.
4130
4131The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4132store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4133bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4134stored.
4135
4136For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4137of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4138@smallexample
4139BYTE(1)
4140LONG(addr)
4141@end smallexample
4142
4143When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4144same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4145target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4146@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4147@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4148
4149If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4150which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4151When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4152true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4153endianness of the first input object file.
4154
36f63dca 4155Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4156between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4157@smallexample
4158SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4159@end smallexample
4160whereas this will work:
4161@smallexample
4162SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4163@end smallexample
4164
252b5132
RH
4165@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4166@cindex holes, filling
4167@cindex unspecified memory
4168You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4169current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4170otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4171gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4172with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4173necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4174point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4175than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4176different parts of an output section.
4177
4178This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4179value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4180@smallexample
563e308f 4181FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4182@end smallexample
4183
4184The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4185section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4186part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4187entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4188precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4189expression.
252b5132
RH
4190
4191@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4192@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4193There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4194commands.
4195
4196@table @code
4197@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4198@cindex input filename symbols
4199@cindex filename symbols
4200@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4201The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4202The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4203file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4204the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4205
4206This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4207normally used for any other object file format.
4208
4209@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4210@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4211@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4212@item CONSTRUCTORS
4213When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4214unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4215destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4216arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4217automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4218For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4219linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4220@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4221ignored for other object file formats.
4222
4223The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4224constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4225Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4226the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4227first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4228of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4229compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4230formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4231@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4232the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4233destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4234@code{exit}.
4235
4236For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4237arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4238addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4239and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4240linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4241runtime code expects to see.
4242
4243@smallexample
4244 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4245 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4246 *(.ctors)
4247 LONG(0)
4248 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4249 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4250 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4251 *(.dtors)
4252 LONG(0)
4253 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4254@end smallexample
4255
4256If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4257which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4258are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4259are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4260command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4261@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4262@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4263@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4264
4265Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4266and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4267need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4268scripts.
4269
4270@end table
4271
4272@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4273@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4274@cindex discarding sections
4275@cindex sections, discarding
4276@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4277The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4278for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4279be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4280@smallexample
49c13adb 4281.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4282@end smallexample
4283@noindent
4284will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4285@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4286sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4287space in an output section will also create the output section.
4288
a0976ea4 4289The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4290on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4291symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4292the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4293section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4294
4295@cindex /DISCARD/
4296The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4297input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4298section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4299
4300@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4301@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4302@cindex output section attributes
4303We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4304like this:
0c71d759 4305
252b5132 4306@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4307@group
7e7d5768 4308@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4309 [AT(@var{lma})]
4310 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4311 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4312 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4313 @{
4314 @var{output-section-command}
4315 @var{output-section-command}
4316 @dots{}
562d3460 4317 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4318@end group
4319@end smallexample
0c71d759 4320
252b5132
RH
4321We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4322@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4323remaining section attributes.
4324
a1ab1d2a 4325@menu
252b5132
RH
4326* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4327* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4328* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4329* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4330* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4331* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4332* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4333* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4334@end menu
4335
4336@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4337@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4338Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4339parentheses. The following types are defined:
4340
4341@table @code
4342@item NOLOAD
4343The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4344loaded into memory when the program is run.
4345@item DSECT
4346@itemx COPY
4347@itemx INFO
4348@itemx OVERLAY
4349These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4350rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4351marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4352section when the program is run.
4353@end table
4354
4355@kindex NOLOAD
4356@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4357@cindex loading, preventing
4358The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4359the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4360the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4361@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4362need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4363@smallexample
4364@group
4365SECTIONS @{
4366 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4367 @dots{}
4368@}
4369@end group
4370@end smallexample
4371
4372@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4373@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4374@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4375@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4376@cindex load address
4377@cindex section load address
4378Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4379@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4380@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4381specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4382address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4383
ea5cae92
NC
4384The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4385specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4386takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4387load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4388region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4389
4390If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4391section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4392load address:
4393
4394@itemize @bullet
4395@item
4396If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4397the LMA address as well.
4398
4399@item
4400If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4401
4402@item
4403Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4404with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4405section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4406VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4407the last section in the located region.
4408
4409@item
4410If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4411that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4412
4413@item
4414If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4415section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4416@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4417
4418@cindex ROM initialized data
4419@cindex initialized data in ROM
4420This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4421example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4422called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4423@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4424even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4425uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4426defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4427counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4428
4429@smallexample
4430@group
4431SECTIONS
4432 @{
4433 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4434 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4435 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4436 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4437 .bss 0x3000 :
4438 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4439@}
4440@end group
4441@end smallexample
4442
4443The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4444this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4445the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4446how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4447script.
4448
4449@smallexample
4450@group
4451extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4452char *src = &_etext;
4453char *dst = &_data;
4454
ea5cae92
NC
4455/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4456while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4457 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4458
ea5cae92 4459/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4460for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4461 *dst = 0;
4462@end group
4463@end smallexample
4464
bbf115d3
L
4465@node Forced Output Alignment
4466@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4467@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4468@cindex forcing output section alignment
4469@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4470You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4471
7e7d5768
AM
4472@node Forced Input Alignment
4473@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4474@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4475@cindex forcing input section alignment
4476@cindex input section alignment
4477You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4478SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4479sections, whether larger or smaller.
4480
0c71d759
NC
4481@node Output Section Constraint
4482@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4483@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4484@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4485@cindex constraints on output sections
4486You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4487of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4488read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4489@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4490
252b5132 4491@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4492@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4493@kindex >@var{region}
4494@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4495@cindex memory regions and sections
4496You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4497using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4498
4499Here is a simple example:
4500@smallexample
4501@group
4502MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4503SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4504@end group
4505@end smallexample
4506
4507@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4508@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4509@kindex :@var{phdr}
4510@cindex section, assigning to program header
4511@cindex program headers and sections
4512You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4513using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4514one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4515assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4516@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4517linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4518
4519Here is a simple example:
4520@smallexample
4521@group
4522PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4523SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4524@end group
4525@end smallexample
4526
4527@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4528@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4529@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4530@cindex section fill pattern
4531@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4532You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4533@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4534(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4535within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4536alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4537necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4538of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4539an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4540fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4541other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4542pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4543expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4544
4545You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4546output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4547
4548Here is a simple example:
4549@smallexample
4550@group
563e308f 4551SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4552@end group
4553@end smallexample
4554
4555@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4556@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4557@kindex OVERLAY
4558@cindex overlays
4559An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4560are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4561the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4562copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4563required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4564can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4565than another.
4566
4567Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4568@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4569output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4570command is as follows:
4571@smallexample
4572@group
4573OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4574 @{
4575 @var{secname1}
4576 @{
4577 @var{output-section-command}
4578 @var{output-section-command}
4579 @dots{}
4580 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4581 @var{secname2}
4582 @{
4583 @var{output-section-command}
4584 @var{output-section-command}
4585 @dots{}
4586 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4587 @dots{}
4588 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4589@end group
4590@end smallexample
4591
4592Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4593section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4594section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4595those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4596except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4597sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4598
4599The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4600addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4601memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4602whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4603and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4604and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4605
4606If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4607among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4608all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4609section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4610NOCROSSREFS}.
4611
4612For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4613provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4614defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4615@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4616the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4617within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4618symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4619
4620At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4621the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4622
4623Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4624@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4625@smallexample
4626@group
4627 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4628 @{
4629 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4630 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4631 @}
4632@end group
4633@end smallexample
4634@noindent
4635This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4636address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4637@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4638following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4639@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4640@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4641
4642C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4643like the following.
4644
4645@smallexample
4646@group
4647 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4648 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4649 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4650@end group
4651@end smallexample
4652
4653Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4654everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4655example could have been written identically as follows.
4656
4657@smallexample
4658@group
4659 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4660 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4661 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4662 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4663 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4664 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4665 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4666@end group
4667@end smallexample
4668
4669@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4670@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4671@kindex MEMORY
4672@cindex memory regions
4673@cindex regions of memory
4674@cindex allocating memory
4675@cindex discontinuous memory
4676The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4677memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4678
4679The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4680memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4681may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4682can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4683set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4684regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4685around to fit into the available regions.
4686
4687A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4688command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4689you wish. The syntax is:
4690@smallexample
4691@group
a1ab1d2a 4692MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4693 @{
4694 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4695 @dots{}
4696 @}
4697@end group
4698@end smallexample
4699
4700The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4701region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4702Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4703with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4704must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4705add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4706command.
252b5132
RH
4707
4708@cindex memory region attributes
4709The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4710whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4711not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4712@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4713section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4714the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4715them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4716
4717The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4718@table @samp
4719@item R
4720Read-only section
4721@item W
4722Read/write section
4723@item X
4724Executable section
4725@item A
4726Allocatable section
4727@item I
4728Initialized section
4729@item L
4730Same as @samp{I}
4731@item !
c09e9a8c 4732Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4733@end table
4734
4735If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4736@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4737attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4738in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4739attributes.
4740
4741@kindex ORIGIN =
4742@kindex o =
4743@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4744The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4745the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4746cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4747abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4748@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4749
4750@kindex LENGTH =
4751@kindex len =
4752@kindex l =
4753The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4754region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4755be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4756@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4757
4758In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4759available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4760and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4761linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4762is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4763or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4764explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4765region.
4766
4767@smallexample
4768@group
a1ab1d2a 4769MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4770 @{
4771 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4772 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4773 @}
4774@end group
4775@end smallexample
4776
4777Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4778specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4779@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4780a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4781output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4782was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4783the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4784output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4785region, the linker will issue an error message.
4786
3ec57632 4787It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4788expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4789@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4790
4791@smallexample
4792@group
c0065db7 4793 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4794@end group
4795@end smallexample
4796
252b5132
RH
4797@node PHDRS
4798@section PHDRS Command
4799@kindex PHDRS
4800@cindex program headers
4801@cindex ELF program headers
4802@cindex program segments
4803@cindex segments, ELF
4804The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4805@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4806loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4807program with the @samp{-p} option.
4808
4809When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4810reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4811program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4812This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4813interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4814
4815The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4816in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4817precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4818the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4819not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4820
4821The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4822generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4823ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4824
4825This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4826@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4827
4828@smallexample
4829@group
4830PHDRS
4831@{
4832 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4833 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4834@}
4835@end group
4836@end smallexample
4837
4838The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4839of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4840header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4841with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4842must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4843is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4844
4845Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4846system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4847specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4848sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4849attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4850Section Phdr}.
4851
4852It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4853merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4854repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4855contain the section.
4856
4857If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4858then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4859not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4860convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4861placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4862default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4863segment at all.
4864
4865@kindex FILEHDR
4866@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4867You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4868the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4869The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4870file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4871include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4872segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4873these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4874
4875The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4876value of the keyword.
4877
4878@table @asis
4879@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4880Indicates an unused program header.
4881
4882@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4883Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4884the file.
4885
4886@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4887Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4888
4889@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4890Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4891found.
4892
4893@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4894Indicates a segment holding note information.
4895
4896@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4897A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4898ABI.
4899
4900@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4901Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4902
4903@item @var{expression}
4904An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4905be used for types not defined above.
4906@end table
4907
4908You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4909in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4910@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4911Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4912output section attribute.
4913
4914The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4915which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4916explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4917an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4918header.
4919
4920Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4921headers used on a native ELF system.
4922
4923@example
4924@group
4925PHDRS
4926@{
4927 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4928 interp PT_INTERP ;
4929 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4930 data PT_LOAD ;
4931 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4932@}
4933
4934SECTIONS
4935@{
4936 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4937 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4938 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4939 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4940 @dots{}
4941 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4942 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4943 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4944 @dots{}
4945@}
4946@end group
4947@end example
4948
4949@node VERSION
4950@section VERSION Command
4951@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4952@cindex symbol versions
4953@cindex version script
4954@cindex versions of symbols
4955The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4956only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4957symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4958a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4959shared library.
4960
4961You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4962you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4963also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4964
4965The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4966@smallexample
4967VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4968@end smallexample
4969
4970The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4971Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4972version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4973version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4974version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4975scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4976library.
4977
4978The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4979examples.
4980
4981@smallexample
4982VERS_1.1 @{
4983 global:
4984 foo1;
4985 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4986 old*;
4987 original*;
4988 new*;
252b5132
RH
4989@};
4990
4991VERS_1.2 @{
4992 foo2;
4993@} VERS_1.1;
4994
4995VERS_2.0 @{
4996 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4997 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 4998 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
4999 "f(int, double)";
5000 @};
252b5132
RH
5001@} VERS_1.2;
5002@end smallexample
5003
5004This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5005version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5006The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5007a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5008of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5009symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5010is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5011in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5012However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5013name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5014
5015Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5016depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5017to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5018
5019Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5020depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5021and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5022
5023When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5024specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5025unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5026unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5027somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5028wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5029wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5030set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5031ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5032
5033The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5034they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5035could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5036However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5037
0f6bf451 5038Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5039in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5040symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5041won't.
5042
5043@smallexample
7c9c73be 5044@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5045@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5046
252b5132
RH
5047When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5048symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5049requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5050shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5051loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5052linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5053application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5054way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5055all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5056search for each symbol reference.
5057
5058The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5059doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5060that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5061functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5062the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5063required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5064that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5065versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5066the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5067
5068There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5069first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5070source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5071script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5072maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5073@smallexample
5074__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5075@end smallexample
5076@noindent
5077in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5078be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5079The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5080@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5081takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5082
5083The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5084function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5085an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5086version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5087linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5088
5089To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5090source file. Here is an example:
5091
5092@smallexample
5093__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5094__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5095__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5096__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5097@end smallexample
5098
5099In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5100unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5101example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5102@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5103
5104When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5105some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5106this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5107@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5108declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5109you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5110
5111If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5112within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5113(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5114specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5115
cb840a31
L
5116You can also specify the language in the version script:
5117
5118@smallexample
5119VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5120@end smallexample
5121
c0065db7 5122The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5123The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5124demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5125patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5126@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5127
86043bbb
MM
5128Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5129described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5130or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5131the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5132whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5133cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5134might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5135should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5136expect when you upgrade.
5137
252b5132
RH
5138@node Expressions
5139@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5140@cindex expressions
5141@cindex arithmetic
5142The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5143that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5144expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5145host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5146
5147You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5148
5149The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5150expressions.
5151
5152@menu
5153* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5154* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5155* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5156* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5157* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5158* Operators:: Operators
5159* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5160* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5161* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5162@end menu
5163
5164@node Constants
5165@subsection Constants
5166@cindex integer notation
5167@cindex constants in linker scripts
5168All constants are integers.
5169
5170As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5171octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5172hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5173@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5174@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5175value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5176
5177@cindex scaled integers
5178@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5179@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5180@cindex suffixes for integers
5181@cindex integer suffixes
5182In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5183constant by
5184@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5185@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5186@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5187@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5188@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5189@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5190@tex
5191${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5192@end tex
5193@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5194respectively. For example, the following
5195all refer to the same quantity:
5196
252b5132 5197@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5198_fourk_1 = 4K;
5199_fourk_2 = 4096;
5200_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5201_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5202@end smallexample
5203
8a308ae8
NC
5204Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5205conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5206
0c71d759
NC
5207@node Symbolic Constants
5208@subsection Symbolic Constants
5209@cindex symbolic constants
5210@kindex CONSTANT
5211It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5212the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5213
5214@table @code
5215@item MAXPAGESIZE
5216@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5217The target's maximum page size.
5218
5219@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5220@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5221The target's default page size.
5222@end table
5223
5224So for example:
5225
5226@smallexample
5227 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5228@end smallexample
5229
5230will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5231supported by the target.
5232
252b5132
RH
5233@node Symbols
5234@subsection Symbol Names
5235@cindex symbol names
5236@cindex names
5237@cindex quoted symbol names
5238@kindex "
5239Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5240and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5241Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5242specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5243keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5244@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5245"SECTION" = 9;
5246"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5247@end smallexample
5248
5249Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5250to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5251whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5252
ecca9871
L
5253@node Orphan Sections
5254@subsection Orphan Sections
5255@cindex orphan
5256Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5257are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5258script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5259output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5260placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5261attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5262same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5263If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5264at the end of the file.
5265
5266For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5267well as section flag.
5268
41911f68 5269If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5270the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5271__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5272section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5273orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5274representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5275character.
5276
252b5132
RH
5277@node Location Counter
5278@subsection The Location Counter
5279@kindex .
5280@cindex dot
5281@cindex location counter
5282@cindex current output location
5283The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5284current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5285location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5286within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5287anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5288
5289@cindex holes
5290Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5291moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5292location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5293and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5294doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5295
5296@smallexample
5297SECTIONS
5298@{
5299 output :
5300 @{
5301 file1(.text)
5302 . = . + 1000;
5303 file2(.text)
5304 . += 1000;
5305 file3(.text)
563e308f 5306 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5307@}
5308@end smallexample
5309@noindent
5310In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5311located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5312followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5313@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5314@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5315specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5316
5c6bbab8
NC
5317@cindex dot inside sections
5318Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5319current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5320statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5321absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5322however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5323not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5324
5325@smallexample
5326SECTIONS
5327@{
5328 . = 0x100
5329 .text: @{
5330 *(.text)
5331 . = 0x200
5332 @}
5333 . = 0x500
5334 .data: @{
5335 *(.data)
5336 . += 0x600
5337 @}
5338@}
5339@end smallexample
5340
5341The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5342and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5343the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5344much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5345move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5346and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5347the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5348the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5349
b5666f2f
AM
5350@cindex dot outside sections
5351Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5352output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5353needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5354
5355@smallexample
5356SECTIONS
5357@{
5358 start_of_text = . ;
5359 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5360 end_of_text = . ;
5361
5362 start_of_data = . ;
5363 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5364 end_of_data = . ;
5365@}
5366@end smallexample
5367
5368If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5369not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5370between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5371should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5372blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5373the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5374sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5375statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5376special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5377place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5378as follows:
5379
5380@smallexample
5381SECTIONS
5382@{
5383 start_of_text = . ;
5384 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5385 end_of_text = . ;
5386
5387 start_of_data = . ;
5388 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5389 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5390 end_of_data = . ;
5391@}
5392@end smallexample
5393
5394This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5395@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5396placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5397assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5398a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5399section. So you could write:
5400
5401@smallexample
5402SECTIONS
5403@{
5404 start_of_text = . ;
5405 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5406 end_of_text = . ;
5407
5408 . = . ;
5409 start_of_data = . ;
5410 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5411 end_of_data = . ;
5412@}
5413@end smallexample
5414
5415Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5416@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5417
252b5132
RH
5418@need 2000
5419@node Operators
5420@subsection Operators
5421@cindex operators for arithmetic
5422@cindex arithmetic operators
5423@cindex precedence in expressions
5424The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5425the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5426@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5427@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5428@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5429@smallexample
5430precedence associativity Operators Notes
5431(highest)
54321 left ! - ~ (1)
54332 left * / %
54343 left + -
54354 left >> <<
54365 left == != > < <= >=
54376 left &
54387 left |
54398 left &&
54409 left ||
544110 right ? :
544211 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5443(lowest)
5444@end smallexample
5445Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5446(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5447(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5448@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5449@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5450@tex
5451\vskip \baselineskip
5452%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5453\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5454\hrule
5455\halign
5456{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5457height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5458&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5459height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5460\noalign{\hrule}
5461height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5462&highest&&&&&\cr
5463% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5464&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5465&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5466&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5467&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5468&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5469&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5470&7&&left&&|&\cr
5471&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5472&9&&left&&||&\cr
5473&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5474&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5475&lowest&&&&&\cr
5476height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5477\hrule}
5478@end tex
5479@iftex
5480{
5481@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5482@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5483@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5484}
5485@end iftex
5486@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5487
5488@node Evaluation
5489@subsection Evaluation
5490@cindex lazy evaluation
5491@cindex expression evaluation order
5492The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5493an expression when absolutely necessary.
5494
5495The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5496address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5497regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5498as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5499
5500However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5501until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5502other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5503for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5504
5505The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5506assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5507allocation.
5508
5509Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5510@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5511
5512If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5513available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5514following
5515@smallexample
5516@group
5517SECTIONS
5518 @{
a1ab1d2a 5519 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5520 @{ *(.text) @}
5521 @}
5522@end group
5523@end smallexample
5524@noindent
5525will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5526address}.
5527
5528@node Expression Section
5529@subsection The Section of an Expression
5530@cindex expression sections
5531@cindex absolute expressions
5532@cindex relative expressions
5533@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5534@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5535@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5536Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5537relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5538using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5539value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5540symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5541operations.
5542
abf4be64
AM
5543Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5544section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5545address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5546@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5547functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5548One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5549(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5550differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5551versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5552section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5553Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5554absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5555given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5556everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5557
5558In the following simple example,
252b5132 5559
7542af2a
AM
5560@smallexample
5561@group
5562SECTIONS
5563 @{
5564 . = 0x100;
5565 __executable_start = 0x100;
5566 .data :
5567 @{
5568 . = 0x10;
5569 __data_start = 0x10;
5570 *(.data)
5571 @}
5572 @dots{}
5573 @}
5574@end group
5575@end smallexample
252b5132 5576
7542af2a
AM
5577both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5578address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5579@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5580section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5581
5c3049d2
AM
5582For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5583addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5584
5585@itemize @bullet
5586@item
5587Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5588relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5589and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5590@item
5591Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5592or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5593same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5594address before applying the operator.
5595@end itemize
5596
5597The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5598
5599@itemize @bullet
5600@item
5601An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5602@item
5603The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5604@item
9bc8bb33
AM
5605The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5606relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
5607(after above conversions) is also a number.
5608@item
5609The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5610relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5611section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5612@item
5613The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5614conversions) is an absolute address.
5615@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5616
5617You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5618to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5619create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5620section @samp{.data}:
5621@smallexample
5622SECTIONS
5623 @{
5624 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5625 @}
5626@end smallexample
5627@noindent
5628If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5629@samp{.data} section.
5630
7542af2a
AM
5631Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5632particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5633
252b5132
RH
5634@node Builtin Functions
5635@subsection Builtin Functions
5636@cindex functions in expressions
5637The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5638use in linker script expressions.
5639
5640@table @code
5641@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5642@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5643@cindex expression, absolute
5644Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5645of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5646value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5647normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5648
5649@item ADDR(@var{section})
5650@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5651@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5652Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5653script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5654the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5655@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5656@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5657the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5658@smallexample
5659@group
5660SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5661 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5662 @{
252b5132
RH
5663 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5664 @dots{}
5665 @}
5666 .output :
5667 @{
5668 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5669 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5670 @}
5671@dots{} @}
5672@end group
5673@end smallexample
5674
876f4090
NS
5675@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5676@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5677@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5678@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5679@cindex round up location counter
5680@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5681@cindex round up expression
5682@cindex align expression
5683Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5684to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5685doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5686arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5687expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5688equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5689
5690Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5691next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5692variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5693input sections:
252b5132
RH
5694@smallexample
5695@group
5696SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5697 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5698 *(.data)
5699 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5700 @}
5701@dots{} @}
5702@end group
5703@end smallexample
5704@noindent
5705The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5706a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5707a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5708of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5709
5710The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5711
362c1d1a
NS
5712@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5713@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5714@cindex section alignment
5715Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5716been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5717evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5718the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5719value in that section.
5720@smallexample
5721@group
5722SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5723 .output @{
5724 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5725 @dots{}
5726 @}
5727@dots{} @}
5728@end group
5729@end smallexample
5730
252b5132
RH
5731@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5732@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5733This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5734scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5735section.
5736
2d20f7bf
JJ
5737@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5738@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5739This is equivalent to either
5740@smallexample
5741(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5742@end smallexample
5743or
5744@smallexample
5745(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5746@end smallexample
5747@noindent
5748depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5749for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5750@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5751If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5752memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5753bytes in the on-disk file.
5754
5755This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5756any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5757@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5758be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5759working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5760
5761@noindent
5762Example:
5763@smallexample
5764 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5765@end smallexample
5766
5767@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5768@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5769This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5770evaluation purposes.
5771
5772@smallexample
5773 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5774@end smallexample
5775
a4f5ad88
JJ
5776@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5777@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5778This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5779@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5780When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5781does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5782@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5783boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5784it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5785@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5786
5787@smallexample
5788 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5789@end smallexample
5790
252b5132
RH
5791@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5792@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5793@cindex symbol defaults
5794Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5795defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5796return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5797default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5798shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5799the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5800existed, its value is preserved:
5801
5802@smallexample
5803@group
5804SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5805 .text : @{
5806 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5807 @dots{}
5808 @}
5809 @dots{}
5810@}
5811@end group
5812@end smallexample
5813
3ec57632
NC
5814@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5815@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5816Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5817
252b5132
RH
5818@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5819@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5820@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5821Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5822Section LMA}).
5823
5824@kindex MAX
5825@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5826Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5827
5828@kindex MIN
5829@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5830Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5831
5832@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5833@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5834@cindex unallocated address, next
5835Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5836This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5837use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5838output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5839
3ec57632
NC
5840@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5841@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5842Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5843
ba916c8a
MM
5844@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5845@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5846Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5847value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5848option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5849@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5850be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5851``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5852name.
5853
252b5132
RH
5854@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5855@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5856@cindex section size
5857Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5858been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5859evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5860@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5861@smallexample
5862@group
5863SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5864 .output @{
5865 .start = . ;
5866 @dots{}
5867 .end = . ;
5868 @}
5869 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5870 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5871@dots{} @}
5872@end group
5873@end smallexample
5874
5875@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5876@itemx sizeof_headers
5877@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5878@cindex header size
5879Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5880information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5881this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5882choose, to facilitate paging.
5883
5884@cindex not enough room for program headers
5885@cindex program headers, not enough room
5886When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5887@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5888number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5889addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5890additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5891room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5892the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5893script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5894you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5895command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5896@end table
5897
5898@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5899@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5900@cindex implicit linker scripts
5901If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5902an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5903linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5904linker will report an error.
5905
5906An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5907
5908Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5909assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5910commands.
5911
5912Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5913at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5914read. This can affect archive searching.
5915
5916@ifset GENERIC
5917@node Machine Dependent
5918@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5919
5920@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5921@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5922sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5923functionality are not listed.
5924
5925@menu
36f63dca
NC
5926@ifset H8300
5927* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5928@end ifset
5929@ifset I960
5930* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5931@end ifset
5932@ifset ARM
5933* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5934@end ifset
5935@ifset HPPA
5936* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5937@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5938@ifset M68K
5939* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5940@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5941@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5942* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5943@end ifset
2469cfa2 5944@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5945* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5946@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5947@ifset M68HC11
5948* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5949@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5950@ifset POWERPC
5951* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5952@end ifset
5953@ifset POWERPC64
5954* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5955@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5956@ifset SPU
5957* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5958@end ifset
74459f0e 5959@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5960* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5961@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5962@ifset WIN32
5963* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5964@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5965@ifset XTENSA
5966* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5967@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5968@end menu
5969@end ifset
5970
252b5132
RH
5971@ifset H8300
5972@ifclear GENERIC
5973@raisesections
5974@end ifclear
5975
5976@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5977@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5978
5979@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5980For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5981you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5982
5983@table @emph
5984@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5985@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5986@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5987targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5988program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5989respectively.
5990
5991@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5992@item synthesizing instructions
5993@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5994@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5995sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5996page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5997(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5998@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5999top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
6000
6001@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6002@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6003biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6004which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6005page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6006(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6007@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6008the top page of memory).
6009
6010@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6011@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
601232 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6013changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6014(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6015@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6016the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6017@end table
6018
6019@ifclear GENERIC
6020@lowersections
6021@end ifclear
6022@end ifset
6023
36f63dca 6024@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6025@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6026@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6027@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6028@node Renesas
6029@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6030
c2dcd04e
NC
6031@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6032H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6033options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6034@end ifset
6035@end ifclear
6036
6037@ifset I960
6038@ifclear GENERIC
6039@raisesections
6040@end ifclear
6041
6042@node i960
6043@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6044
6045@cindex i960 support
6046
6047You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6048specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6049family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6050incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6051linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6052libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6053search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6054
6055For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6056well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6057paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6058the names
6059
6060@smallexample
6061@group
6062try
6063libtry.a
6064tryca
6065libtryca.a
6066@end group
6067@end smallexample
6068
6069@noindent
6070The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6071two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6072
6073You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6074the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6075use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6076specifies a library.
6077
6078@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6079@cindex relaxing on i960
6080@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6081you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6082@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6083them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6084instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6085instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6086target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6087not itself call any subroutines).
6088
48229727
JB
6089@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6090@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6091@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6092The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6093
6094The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6095
85fdf906
AH
6096@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6097@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6098The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6099
36f63dca
NC
6100@ifclear GENERIC
6101@lowersections
6102@end ifclear
6103@end ifset
6104
6105@ifset ARM
6106@ifclear GENERIC
6107@raisesections
6108@end ifclear
6109
93fd0973
SC
6110@ifset M68HC11
6111@ifclear GENERIC
6112@raisesections
6113@end ifclear
6114
6115@node M68HC11/68HC12
6116@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6117
6118@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6119
6120@subsection Linker Relaxation
6121
6122For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6123optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6124
6125@table @emph
6126@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6127@item relaxing address modes
6128@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6129targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6130program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6131respectively.
6132
6133@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6134transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6135page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6136
6137@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6138When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6139of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6140addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6141@code{bset} instructions.
6142
6143@end table
6144
6145@subsection Trampoline Generation
6146
6147@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6148@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6149For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6150call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6151will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6152trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6153case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6154point to the function trampoline.
6155
6156@ifclear GENERIC
6157@lowersections
6158@end ifclear
6159@end ifset
6160
36f63dca 6161@node ARM
3674e28a 6162@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6163
6164@cindex ARM interworking support
6165@kindex --support-old-code
6166For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6167between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6168been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6169line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6170libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6171option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6172given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6173which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6174the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6175non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6176
6177@cindex thumb entry point
6178@cindex entry point, thumb
6179@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6180The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6181@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6182But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6183branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6184executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6185
ce11ba6c
KT
6186@cindex PE import table prefixing
6187@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6188The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6189the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6190elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6191import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6192
e489d0ae
PB
6193@cindex BE8
6194@kindex --be8
6195The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6196executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6197The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6198
3674e28a
PB
6199@cindex TARGET1
6200@kindex --target1-rel
6201@kindex --target1-abs
6202The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6203@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6204or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6205and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6206
6207@cindex TARGET2
6208@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6209The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6210@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6211meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6212@table @samp
6213@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6214@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6215@item abs
6216@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6217@item got-rel
6218@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6219@end table
6220
319850b4
JB
6221@cindex FIX_V4BX
6222@kindex --fix-v4bx
6223The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6224specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6225interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6226also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6227
6228In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6229linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6230@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6231
6232In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6233relocations are ignored.
6234
845b51d6
PB
6235@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6236@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6237Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6238relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6239
6240@smallexample
6241TST rM, #1
6242MOVEQ PC, rM
6243BX Rn
6244@end smallexample
6245
6246This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6247and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6248condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6249
33bfe774
JB
6250@cindex USE_BLX
6251@kindex --use-blx
6252The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6253BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6254situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6255code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6256each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6257
6258This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6259specify it if you are using that target.
6260
c6dd86c6
JB
6261@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6262@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6263The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6264bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6265instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6266to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6267the support code can read the intended values.
6268
6269The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6270intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6271and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6272intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6273full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6274you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6275
6276If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6277enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6278@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6279mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6280vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6281@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6282
6283If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6284potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6285such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6286first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6287instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6288the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6289are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6290
bf21ed78
MS
6291@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6292@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6293The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6294warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6295enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6296linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6297using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6298not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6299
6300@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6301@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6302The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6303warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6304@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6305linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6306using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6307
726150b7
NC
6308@cindex PIC_VENEER
6309@kindex --pic-veneer
6310The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6311ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6312is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6313@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6314
6315@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6316@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6317The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6318code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6319perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6320placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6321controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6322The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6323duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6324group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6325code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6326where they should be placed.
6327
6328The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6329@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6330placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6331branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6332placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6333value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6334exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6335A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6336linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6337from the input sections.
6338
6339The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6340@samp{N = +1}.
6341
1a51c1a4
NC
6342Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6343only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6344otherwise.
6345
36f63dca
NC
6346@ifclear GENERIC
6347@lowersections
6348@end ifclear
6349@end ifset
6350
6351@ifset HPPA
6352@ifclear GENERIC
6353@raisesections
6354@end ifclear
6355
6356@node HPPA ELF32
6357@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6358@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6359@kindex --multi-subspace
6360When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6361import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6362The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6363stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6364multiple sub-spaces.
6365
6366@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6367@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6368Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6369stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6370@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6371sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6372a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6373the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6374conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6375prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6376A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6377branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6378@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6379@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6380detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6381positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6382
6383Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6384single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6385create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6386large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6387
6388@ifclear GENERIC
6389@lowersections
6390@end ifclear
6391@end ifset
6392
7fb9f789
NC
6393@ifset M68K
6394@ifclear GENERIC
6395@raisesections
6396@end ifclear
6397
6398@node M68K
6399@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6400
6401@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6402@kindex --got=@var{type}
6403The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6404The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6405@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6406the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6407@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6408entries only at non-negative offsets.
6409@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6410entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6411support such GOTs.
6412@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6413output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6414file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6415files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6416
6417@ifclear GENERIC
6418@lowersections
6419@end ifclear
6420@end ifset
6421
36f63dca
NC
6422@ifset MMIX
6423@ifclear GENERIC
6424@raisesections
6425@end ifclear
6426
6427@node MMIX
6428@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6429For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6430@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6431understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6432can translate between the two formats.
6433
6434There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6435Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6436registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6437equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6438@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6439global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6440this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6441symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6442
7a2de473
HPN
6443Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6444@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6445The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6446of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6447
6448Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6449are left out from an mmo file.
6450
6451@ifclear GENERIC
6452@lowersections
6453@end ifclear
6454@end ifset
6455
6456@ifset MSP430
6457@ifclear GENERIC
6458@raisesections
6459@end ifclear
6460
6461@node MSP430
6462@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6463For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6464will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6465just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6466
6467@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6468The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6469
6470@table @code
6471@item @samp{.vectors}
6472Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6473
6474@item @samp{.bootloader}
6475Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6476in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6477
6478@item @samp{.infomem}
6479Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6480this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6481
c0065db7 6482@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6483This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6484in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6485
6486@item @samp{.noinit}
6487Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6488
c0065db7 6489The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6490@end table
6491
6492@ifclear GENERIC
6493@lowersections
6494@end ifclear
6495@end ifset
6496
2a60a7a8
AM
6497@ifset POWERPC
6498@ifclear GENERIC
6499@raisesections
6500@end ifclear
6501
6502@node PowerPC ELF32
6503@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6504@cindex PowerPC long branches
6505@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6506Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6507displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6508@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6509@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6510the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6511section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6512section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6513@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6514both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6515considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6516
6517@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6518@table @option
6519@cindex PowerPC PLT
6520@kindex --bss-plt
6521@item --bss-plt
6522Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6523generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6524the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6525writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6526@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6527PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6528compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6529BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6530
016687f8
AM
6531@kindex --secure-plt
6532@item --secure-plt
6533@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6534@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6535when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6536layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6537style BSS PLT.
6538
2a60a7a8
AM
6539@cindex PowerPC GOT
6540@kindex --sdata-got
6541@item --sdata-got
6542The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6543sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6544@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6545section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6546@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6547@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6548@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6549@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6550PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6551pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6552GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6553really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6554
6555@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6556@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6557@item --emit-stub-syms
6558This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6559symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6560
6561@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6562@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6563@item --no-tls-optimize
6564PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6565sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6566disable the optimization.
6567@end table
6568
6569@ifclear GENERIC
6570@lowersections
6571@end ifclear
6572@end ifset
6573
6574@ifset POWERPC64
6575@ifclear GENERIC
6576@raisesections
6577@end ifclear
6578
6579@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6580@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6581
6582@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6583@table @option
6584@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6585@kindex --stub-group-size
6586@item --stub-group-size
6587Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6588by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6589@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6590sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6591a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6592the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6593conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6594prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6595A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6596branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6597@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6598@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6599detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6600positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6601
6602Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6603single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6604create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6605large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6606
6607@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6608@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6609@item --emit-stub-syms
6610This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6611symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6612
6613@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6614@kindex --dotsyms
6615@kindex --no-dotsyms
6616@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6617These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6618in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6619function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6620code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6621properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6622to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6623@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6624dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6625feature.
6626
6627@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6628@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6629@item --no-tls-optimize
6630PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6631sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6632disable the optimization.
6633
6634@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6635@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6636@item --no-opd-optimize
6637PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6638corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6639the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6640Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6641
6642@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6643@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6644@item --non-overlapping-opd
6645Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6646@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6647the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6648entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6649
6650@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6651@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6652@item --no-toc-optimize
6653PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6654entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6655reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6656marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6657marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6658relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6659unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6660reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6661discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6662reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6663code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6664optimization.
6665
6666@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6667@kindex --no-multi-toc
6668@item --no-multi-toc
6669By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6670entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6671total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6672grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6673TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6674calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6675help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
667664K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6677Use this option to turn off this feature.
6678@end table
6679
6680@ifclear GENERIC
6681@lowersections
6682@end ifclear
6683@end ifset
6684
49fa1e15
AM
6685@ifset SPU
6686@ifclear GENERIC
6687@raisesections
6688@end ifclear
6689
6690@node SPU ELF
6691@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6692
6693@cindex SPU ELF options
6694@table @option
6695
6696@cindex SPU plugins
6697@kindex --plugin
6698@item --plugin
6699This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6700
6701@cindex SPU overlays
6702@kindex --no-overlays
6703@item --no-overlays
6704Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6705regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6706@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6707turns off all this special overlay handling.
6708
6709@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6710@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6711@item --emit-stub-syms
6712This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6713symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6714
6715@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6716@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6717@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6718This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6719function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6720on calls to non-overlay regions.
6721
6722@cindex SPU local store size
6723@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6724@item --local-store=lo:hi
6725@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6726the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6727range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6728
c0065db7 6729@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6730@kindex --stack-analysis
6731@item --stack-analysis
6732SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6733unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6734under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6735@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6736@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6737determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6738for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6739for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6740for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6741find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6742and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6743under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6744dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6745is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6746and calls will be given.
6747
c0065db7 6748@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6749@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6750@item --emit-stack-syms
6751This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6752in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6753These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6754functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6755functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6756such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6757The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6758@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6759@end table
6760
6761@ifclear GENERIC
6762@lowersections
6763@end ifclear
6764@end ifset
6765
36f63dca
NC
6766@ifset TICOFF
6767@ifclear GENERIC
6768@raisesections
6769@end ifclear
6770
6771@node TI COFF
6772@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6773@cindex TI COFF versions
6774@kindex --format=@var{version}
6775The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6776TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6777also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6778format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6779header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6780
6781@ifclear GENERIC
6782@lowersections
6783@end ifclear
6784@end ifset
6785
2ca22b03
NC
6786@ifset WIN32
6787@ifclear GENERIC
6788@raisesections
6789@end ifclear
6790
6791@node WIN32
6792@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6793
c0065db7 6794This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6795See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6796command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6797
6798@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6799@cindex import libraries
6800@item import libraries
69da35b5 6801The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6802libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6803regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6804archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6805support for creating such libraries provided with the
6806@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6807
c0065db7
RM
6808@item exporting DLL symbols
6809@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6810The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6811
6812@table @emph
6813@item using auto-export functionality
6814@cindex using auto-export functionality
6815By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6816which is controlled by the following command line options:
6817
0a5d968e
NC
6818@itemize
6819@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6820@item --exclude-symbols
6821@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6822@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6823@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6824@end itemize
6825
09e2aba4
DK
6826When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6827(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6828symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6829often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6830private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6831options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6832exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6833final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6834
6835If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6836command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6837if either of the following are true:
6838
6839@itemize
6840@item A DEF file is used.
6841@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6842@end itemize
dc8465bf 6843
c0065db7
RM
6844@item using a DEF file
6845@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6846Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6847an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6848exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6849name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6850command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6851
6852@example
6853gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6854@end example
6855
0a5d968e
NC
6856Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6857@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6858
dc8465bf
NC
6859Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6860
6861@example
4b5bd4e7 6862LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6863
6864EXPORTS
6865foo
6866bar
6867_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6868another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6869var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6870doo = foo == foo2
6871eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6872@end example
dc8465bf 6873
7fcab871 6874This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6875symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6876alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6877by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6878@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6879@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6880export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6881in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6882symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6883
6b31ad16
DS
6884The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6885name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6886the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6887
b45619c0
NC
6888When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6889library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6890@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6891executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6892
6893With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6894specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6895non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6896
6897If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6898or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6899filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6900
4b5bd4e7
DS
6901The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6902
6903@example
6904EXPORTS
6905 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6906 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6907 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6908@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6909
6910Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6911@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6912@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6913@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6914Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6915@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6916string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6917
6918The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6919
6920@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6921will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6922by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6923linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6924library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6925
6926@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6927The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6928the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6929@code{*_imp__foo}).
6930
6931@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6932well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6933read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6934variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6935the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6936extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6937application will behave unexpectedly.
6938
6939@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6940it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6941symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6942API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6943the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6944
4b5bd4e7
DS
6945See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6946other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6947
6948@cindex creating a DEF file
6949While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6950with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6951
6952@item Using decorations
6953@cindex Using decorations
6954Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6955itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6956declared as:
6957
6958@example
6959__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6960__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6961@end example
6962
6963All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6964any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6965this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6966the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6967
6968Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6969decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6970instead:
6971
6972@example
6973__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6974__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6975@end example
6976
c0065db7
RM
6977This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6978when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6979variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6980code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6981of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6982omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6983@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6984information.
c0065db7 6985@end table
dc8465bf 6986
2ca22b03
NC
6987@cindex automatic data imports
6988@item automatic data imports
6989The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6990by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6991compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6992issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6993code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6994c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6995initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6996decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6997platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6998command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6999The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7000suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7001trigger the feature's use.
7002
c0065db7 7003auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7004additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7005
c0065db7 7006"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7007documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7008
c0065db7
RM
7009The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7010occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7011One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7012below.
7013
7014@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7015For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7016object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7017offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7018field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7019in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7020without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7021The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7022references.
7023
c0065db7
RM
7024The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7025be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7026themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7027runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7028compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7029support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7030run without error on an older system.
7031
c0065db7
RM
7032@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7033enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7034
7035@cindex direct linking to a dll
7036@item direct linking to a dll
7037The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7038including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7039libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7040traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7041libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7042function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7043though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7044storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7045tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7046large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7047
c0065db7 7048Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7049@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7050of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7051perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7052select the dll instead of an import library.
7053
2ca22b03 7054
69da35b5
NC
7055For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7056to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7057
7058@example
45e948fe
NC
7059libxxx.dll.a
7060xxx.dll.a
7061libxxx.a
7062xxx.lib
69da35b5 7063cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7064libxxx.dll
7065xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7066@end example
7067
69da35b5
NC
7068before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7069
c0065db7
RM
7070(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7071where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7072@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7073file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7074@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7075
c0065db7
RM
7076Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7077@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7078was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7079various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7080could coexist on the same machine.
7081
2ca22b03
NC
7082The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7083applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7084libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7085
7086@example
7087bin/
7088 cygxxx.dll
7089lib/
7090 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7091 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7092@end example
7093
c0065db7
RM
7094Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7095done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7096
70971. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7098@example
7099gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7100@end example
2ca22b03 7101
69da35b5
NC
7102However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7103(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7104@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7105not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7106
2ca22b03
NC
71072. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7108directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7109should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7110making the app/dll.
7111
7112@example
7113ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7114@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7115
7116Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7117
7118@example
7119gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7120@end example
69da35b5
NC
7121
7122This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7123perfectly legal
7124
7125@example
7126bin/
7127 cygxxx-5.dll
7128lib/
c0065db7 7129 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7130@end example
7131
dc8465bf 7132Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7133even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7134@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7135
7136Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7137wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7138
71391. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7140work with auto-imported data.
7141
dc8465bf
NC
71422. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7143import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7144symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7145for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7146possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7147
45e948fe
NC
71483. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7149critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7150in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7151stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7152
69da35b5 7153So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7154true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7155a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7156binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7157massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7158requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7159will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7160
c0065db7 7161@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7162@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7163@item adding additional names
7164Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7165A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7166exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7167when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7168import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7169
c0065db7 7170@example
dc8465bf
NC
7171LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7172
7173EXPORTS
c0065db7 7174foo
dc8465bf 7175_foo = foo
c0065db7 7176@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7177
7178The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7179
7180Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7181source code using the "weak" attribute:
7182
c0065db7
RM
7183@example
7184void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7185void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7186@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7187
7188See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7189symbols.
7190
7191@item renaming symbols
7192Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7193kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7194@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7195DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7196created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7197
c0065db7 7198@example
dc8465bf
NC
7199LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7200
7201EXPORTS
7202_foo = foo
c0065db7 7203@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7204
7205The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7206@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7207@end table
dc8465bf 7208
0a5d968e 7209Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7210unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7211If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7212@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7213that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7214@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7215renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7216to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7217the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7218In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7219which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7220
7221@cindex weak externals
7222@item weak externals
7223The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7224weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7225defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7226are three variants of weak externals:
7227@itemize
7228@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7229called lazy externals.
7230@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7231This form is not presently implemented.
7232@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7233implemented.
7234@end itemize
7235As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7236are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7237uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7238
7239@cindex aligned common symbols
7240@item aligned common symbols
7241As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7242desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7243the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7244carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7245by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7246tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7247but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7248warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7249@end table
7250
7251@ifclear GENERIC
7252@lowersections
7253@end ifclear
7254@end ifset
7255
e0001a05
NC
7256@ifset XTENSA
7257@ifclear GENERIC
7258@raisesections
7259@end ifclear
7260
7261@node Xtensa
7262@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7263
7264@cindex Xtensa processors
7265The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7266@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7267specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7268keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7269example, with the command:
7270
7271@smallexample
7272SECTIONS
7273@{
7274 .text : @{
7275 *(.literal .text)
7276 @}
7277@}
7278@end smallexample
7279
7280@noindent
7281@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7282and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7283literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7284interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7285group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7286files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7287and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7288
43cd72b9 7289@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7290@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7291Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7292provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7293is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7294literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7295will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7296location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7297the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7298unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7299@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7300range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7301
7302For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7303to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7304instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7305instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7306instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7307@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7308hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7309By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7310switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7311density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7312instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7313performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7314linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7315a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7316
7317The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7318control the linker:
7319
7320@cindex Xtensa options
7321@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7322@item --size-opt
7323When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7324more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7325no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7326alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7327preserve the correctness of the code.
7328@end table
e0001a05
NC
7329
7330@ifclear GENERIC
7331@lowersections
7332@end ifclear
7333@end ifset
7334
252b5132
RH
7335@ifclear SingleFormat
7336@node BFD
7337@chapter BFD
7338
7339@cindex back end
7340@cindex object file management
7341@cindex object formats available
7342@kindex objdump -i
7343The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7344These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7345object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7346format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7347it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7348associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7349object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7350(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7351list all the formats available for your configuration.
7352
7353@cindex BFD requirements
7354@cindex requirements for BFD
7355As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7356several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7357BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7358formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7359been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7360BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7361may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7362
7363One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7364mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7365useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7366conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7367
7368@menu
7369* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7370@end menu
7371
7372@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7373@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7374@cindex opening object files
7375@include bfdsumm.texi
7376@end ifclear
7377
7378@node Reporting Bugs
7379@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7380@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7381@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7382
ff5dcc92 7383Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7384
7385Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7386it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7387to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7388work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7389@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7390
7391In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7392information that enables us to fix the bug.
7393
7394@menu
7395* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7396* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7397@end menu
7398
7399@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7400@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7401@cindex bug criteria
7402
7403If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7404
7405@itemize @bullet
7406@cindex fatal signal
7407@cindex linker crash
7408@cindex crash of linker
7409@item
7410If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7411@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7412
7413@cindex error on valid input
7414@item
ff5dcc92 7415If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7416
7417@cindex invalid input
7418@item
ff5dcc92 7419If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7420may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7421object files are correct.
7422
7423@item
7424If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7425improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7426@end itemize
7427
7428@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7429@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7430@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7431@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7432
7433A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7434products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7435recommend you contact that organization first.
7436
7437You can find contact information for many support companies and
7438individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7439distribution.
7440
ad22bfe8 7441@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7442Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7443@value{BUGURL}.
7444@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7445
7446The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7447@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7448fact or leave it out, state it!
7449
7450Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7451problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7452assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7453matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7454the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7455location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7456were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7457into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7458specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7459and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7460
7461Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7462the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7463on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7464
7465Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7466bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7467respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7468You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7469
7470To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7471
7472@itemize @bullet
7473@item
ff5dcc92 7474The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7475the @samp{--version} argument.
7476
7477Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7478the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7479
7480@item
ff5dcc92 7481Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7482patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7483
7484@item
7485The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7486version number.
7487
7488@item
ff5dcc92 7489What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7490``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7491
7492@item
7493The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7494observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7495list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7496sufficient.
7497
7498If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7499and then we might not encounter the bug.
7500
7501@item
7502A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7503bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7504provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7505bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7506state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7507requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7508we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7509attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7510
7511If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7512@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7513object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7514@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7515how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7516
7517@item
7518A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7519incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7520
ff5dcc92 7521Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7522will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7523not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7524a chance to make a mistake.
7525
7526Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7527say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7528copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7529C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7530and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7531fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7532you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7533any conclusion from our observations.
7534
7535@item
ff5dcc92 7536If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7537diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7538@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7539If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7540context, not by line number.
7541
7542The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7543sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7544@end itemize
7545
7546Here are some things that are not necessary:
7547
7548@itemize @bullet
7549@item
7550A description of the envelope of the bug.
7551
7552Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7553which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7554changes will not affect it.
7555
7556This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7557will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7558with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7559We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7560
7561Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7562of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7563output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7564less time, and so on.
7565
7566However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7567report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7568
7569@item
7570A patch for the bug.
7571
7572A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7573the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7574a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7575to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7576
ff5dcc92 7577Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7578construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7579through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7580able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7581fixed.
7582
7583And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7584patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7585help us to understand.
7586
7587@item
7588A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7589
7590Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7591things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7592@end itemize
7593
7594@node MRI
7595@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7596@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7597To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7598linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7599alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7600described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7601simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7602@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7603linker commands; these commands are described here.
7604
7605In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7606file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7607features to make use of them.
7608
7609You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7610@samp{-c} command-line option.
7611
7612Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7613command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7614blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7615MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7616issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7617
7618Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7619
7620You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7621lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7622The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7623
7624@table @code
7625@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7626@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7627@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7628Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7629the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7630@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7631your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7632script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7633commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7634input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7635@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7636
7637@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7638@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7639Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7640in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7641
7642@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7643
7644@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7645@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7646Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7647@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7648
7649@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7650@item BASE @var{expression}
7651Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7652absolute addresses) in the output file.
7653
7654@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7655@item CHIP @var{expression}
7656@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7657This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7658
7659@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7660@item END
7661This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7662
7663@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7664@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7665Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7666language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7667
7668@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7669@item
252b5132
RH
7670S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7671
7672@item
7673IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7674
7675@item
7676COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7677@samp{COFF}
7678@end enumerate
7679
7680@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7681@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7682Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7683@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7684
7685The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7686same line, with no change in its effect.
7687
7688@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7689@item LOAD @var{filename}
7690@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7691Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7692same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7693command line.
7694
7695@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7696@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7697@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7698MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7699option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7700
7701@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7702@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7703@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7704Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7705order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7706script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7707sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7708file, in the order specified.
7709
7710@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7711@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7712@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7713@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7714Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7715@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7716
7717@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7718@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7719@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7720@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7721You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7722specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7723If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7724@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7725@end table
7726
793c5807
NC
7727@node GNU Free Documentation License
7728@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7729@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7730
370b66a1
CD
7731@node LD Index
7732@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7733
7734@printindex cp
7735
7736@tex
7737% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7738% meantime:
7739\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7740\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7741\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7742\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7743\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7744\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7745\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7746\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7747\page\colophon
7748% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7749@end tex
7750
252b5132 7751@bye
This page took 0.98183 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.